1998 Sec 8-Body and Accessories PG 8-1 - PG 8-244

Section 8
Body and Accessories
Lighting Systems ....................................... 8-15 Headlamps Inoperative -

Specifications ......... ........ ..................... 8-15 Right Low Beam ......................................8-108
Fastener Tightening Specifications .... . 8-15 Headlamps Inoperative - Low Beams.........8-108
Bulb Usage............ ................ ................. 8-15 Headlamps Inoperative -
GM SPO Group Numbers...................... 8-18 Left High Beam .........................................8-109
Schematic and Routing Diagrams ......... 8-19 Headlamps Inoperative -
Lighting Systems Schematic References 8-19 Right High Beam .... ..................................8-110
Lighting Systems Schematic Icons ........ 8-19 Headlamps Inoperative - High Beams
(Daytime Running Lamps)........................ 8-110
Headlights Schematics........................... 8-20
Headlamps Inoperative - High Beams
Headlights DRL Schematics .................. 8-22
(Headlamps) ........................ ................... ,.8-111
Fog Lights Schematics .................. . 8-25
Headlamps Inoperative - One Lamp...........8-111
Exterior Lights Schematics.............. ...... 8-26
Headlamps Inoperative - Low and
Backup Lights Schematics ...... . 8-33 High Beams (Daytime Running Lamps).... 8-112
Interior Lights Schematics ....................... 8-34 Headlamps Inoperative - Low and
Interior Lights Dimming Schematics....... 8-41 High Beams (Headlamps) .................... ....8-112
Component Locator.................................. 8-44 Headlamps, DRL On With Park
Lighting Systems Components ......... . 8-44 Brake Applied........................................... .8-113
Lighting Systems Component Views..... 8-56 High Beam Indicator Inoperative
Visual Identification........................... . 8-82 (Daytime Running Lamps)........................ 8-113
Lighting Systems Connector End Views 8-82 High Beam Indicator Inoperative
Diagnostic Information and Procedures 8-92 (Headlamps) ............... .............................. 8-114
Headlight System Check........ 8-92 Illuminated Entry Lamps Inoperative .......... .8-114
DRL System Check ........................... . 8-92 IP Compartment Lamp Inoperative ............. 8-115
Fog Lights System Check ........ . 8-93 Vanity Mirror Lamps Inoperative..................8-115
Exterior Lights System Check ............... 8-93 Underhood Lamp Inoperative .............. ....... 8-115
Backup Lights System Check........... . 8-94 Instrument Panel Lamps Inop in
Interior Lamps System Check ............... 8-94 Parade Mode............. ..... ..........................8-116
Interior Lights Dimming System Check .. 8-95 Instrument Panel Lamps Inoperative..........8-116
Backup Lamps Inoperative — 8-95 Endgate Identification Lamps Inoperative ....8-117
Backup Lamps Always On ..... 8-96 Roof Marker Lamps Inoperative ................. 8-118
Clearance Lamps Inoperative .. 8-96 License Lamps Inoperative (One Lamp) .... 8-118
Component Illumination Lamps License Lamps Inoperative
Inoperative ....................... ......... ...... ....... ...8-97 (Both Lamps)......................... ................... 8-119
Courtesy Lamps Inoperative - Ashtray..... ....8-98 Marker Lamps Inoperative........................... 8-119
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Inoperative ..........8-98 Park and Tail Lamps Inoperative............. ...8-120
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Always On ........8-100 Stop Lamps Always On (Pickup) ................ 8-120
DRL Headlamps Always On ................... .....8-101 Stop Lamps Always On
DRL Headlamps Inoperative........................ 8-102 (Suburban/Utility) ...................................... 8-121
DRL Indicator Inoperative ............................. 8-104 Stop Lamps Inoperative - All (Pickup) ........8-121
Fog Lamps Always O n ......................... ....... 8-104 Stop Lamps Inoperative - All
Fog Lamps Inoperative - A ll........................8-105 (Suburban/Utility) .............. .................. ..... 8-122
Fog Lamp Indicator Inoperative ................... 8-106 Stop Lamps Always On -
Hazard Lamps Inoperative ..........................8-106 Center High Mounted ........................... .....8-123
Headlamps Inoperative - Left Low Beam ....8-107 Stop Lamps Inoperative -
Center High Mounted................................ 8-123
Spotlamp Inoperative.....................................8-124 S id e M ark er L am p R e p la c e m e n t ...... ......... 8 -1 6 0
Turn Signal Lamps Inoperative - C a rg o L am p R e p l a c e m e n t .......................... 8-161
Left or Right Side ......................................8-124 C a rg o L am p S w itch R e p la c e m e n t (F o g ) .....8 -1 6 2
Turn Signal Indicators Inoperative ............ .8-125 C a rg o L am p S w itch R e p la c e m e n t
Repair Instructions......................................... 8-126 (C a rg o /D o m e ) .......................................... 8 -1 6 2
Headlamp Replacement ............................... 8-126 E n d g a te L am p R e p la c e m e n t ...................... 8 -1 6 3
Headlamp Bulb Replacement .......... ...........8-127 D e s c r ip tio n a n d O p e r a t i o n .......................... 8 -1 6 4
Headlamp Control Module Replacement.... 8-128 DRL C ircuit D e s c r ip tio n .............................. 8 -1 6 4
Headlamp Aiming (Sealed Beam)............... 8-130 F o g L ights C ircuit D e s c rip tio n ..................... 8 -1 6 4
Headlamp Aiming (Composite) ....................8-131 E x terio r L ights C ircuit D e s c r ip tio n ...............8 -1 6 4
Fog Lamp Replacement - Front ..................8-134 B a c k u p L ights C ircuit D escrip tio n ...............8 -1 6 6
Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement - Front .........8-134 Interior L ights C ircuit D e s c r ip tio n .......... .....8 -1 6 6
Fog Lamp Aiming Procedure ................... ....8-135 I n terio r L ights D im m ing C ircuit
Marker Lamp Replacement - D escrip tio n .................................. ........... 8 -1 6 6
Side (Composite).................................... ..8-136 S p e c ia l T o o ls a n d E q u i p m e n t .... ................ 8 -1 6 6
Marker Lamp Replacement - Side
(Sealed)....................... .................... ......... 8-137 W i p e r s / W a s h e r S y s t e m s ...... .......................8 -1 6 7
Park/Turn Signal Lamp Replacement S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ................................................8 -1 6 7
(Composite) ............................................... 8-138 F a s te n e r T ig h ten in g S p e c ific a tio n s .............8 -1 6 7
Park/Turn Signal Lamp Replacement S c h e m a ti c a n d R o u tin g D ia g r a m s .............. 8 -1 6 7
(Sealed Beam) ............ .............................8-138 W iperA /V asher S y s te m S c h e m a tic
Spotlamp Replacement .............................. ..8-139 R e f e r e n c e s ................ ............. ............ ...8 -1 6 7
Spotlamp Bulb Replacement .................... ...8-141 W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m S c h e m a tic Ic o n s ......8 -1 6 7
Spotlamp Travel Adjustment...................... ..8-141 W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m (P u lse )
Marker Lamp Replacement - Roof ....... ......8-142 S c h e m a tic s ........ ......... ............................. 8 -1 6 8
Clearance Lamp Replacement................... ..8-143 W ip e r/W a sh e r S y s te m (R ear)
Headlamp Switch Replacement............ ...... 8-144 S c h e m a t i c s ............................ ................. 8 -1 6 9
Fog Lamp Switch Replacement - Front ......8-144 C o m p o n e n t L o c a t o r ........... ....................... 8 -1 7 0
DRL Control Module Replacement ............. 8-146 W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m C o m p o n e n ts ............ 8 -1 7 0
DRL Relay Replacement ................. .......... ..8-146 W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Emergency Roof Lamp Switch C o m p o n e n t V iew s ................................ ....8 -1 7 1
Replacement........................................... ...8-147 V is u a l Id e n tif ic a tio n ...................................... 8 -1 7 6
Console Lamp Replacement............. ......... .8-148 W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m C o n n e c to r
Courtesy Lamp/Reflector E n d V iew s ....................... ...... ........ ...... ...8 -1 7 6
Replacement - Door .......... ........ ..............8-149
D ia g n o s tic In f o rm a tio n a n d P r o c e d u r e s .... 8 -1 7 8
IP Compartment Lamp Replacement.......... 8-150
W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m C h e c k ..................... 8 -1 7 8
Ashtray Lamp Replacement .........................8-150
W ip e r/W a s h e r R e a r S y s te m C h e c k ........... 8 -1 7 8
Vanity Mirror Lamp Replacement ................ 8-151
Trans Fir Shift Control Indicator
W ip e rs All M o d e s I n o p e r a tiv e ..................... 8 -1 7 9
Lamp Replacement....................................8-152 W ip e rs D elay M o d e In o p e rativ e ( R e a r ) ....... 8 -1 8 0
Dome Lamp Replacement W ip e rs D elay M o d e In o p e ra tiv e (F ront) ..... 8 -1 8 0
(All Models Except Suburban)..................8-152 W ip e rs H igh M o d e In o p e rativ e,
Dome Lamp Replacement (Suburban)........8-153 Low M o d e O p e r a te s ............................... 8-181
Door Jamb Switch Replacement (Door)......8-154 W ip e rs A lw ays O n ........................ ............. 8-181
Door Jamb Switch Replacement W a s h e r s In o p e rativ e .................................. 8 -1 8 2
(Liftgate) ..................................................... 8-154 W ip er A rm Tip P r e s s u r e C h e c k ,
License Lamp Replacement B lad e E le m e n t C h e c k ....... ............ .........8 -1 8 3
(W/Step Bumper).......................................8-155 W ip e rs In o p e ra tiv e - R e a r ............... ........... 8 -1 8 4
License Lamp Replacement W ip e rs A lw ay s O n - R e a r ..................... .....8 -1 8 5
(W/O Step Bumper) ............ ..................... 8-156 W a s h e r s In o p e rativ e - R e a r ........ .............. 8 -1 8 5
License Lamp Replacement R e p a ir I n s t r u c t i o n s ....................................... 8 -1 8 6
(Pickup w/Platform Hitch) ........ .................8-157 W a s h e r S o lv e n t C o n ta in e r R e p la c e m e n t .....8 -1 8 6
License Lamp Replacement W a s h e r P u m p R e p l a c e m e n t ................... ....8 -1 8 7
(Cab/Chassis w/Platform Hitch) ................ 8-157
W ip e r A rm R e p la c e m e n t ............ ............... 8 -1 8 7
License Lamp Replacement
(Pickup w/o Bumper) .... ........................... 8-158 W ip e r A rm B lad e R e p la c e m e n t .................. 8 -1 8 9
Tail/Turn Signal Lamp Replacement W ip e r B la d e E le m e n t R e p la c e m e n t ........... 8 -1 9 0
(Cab/Chassis)............................................ 8-159 W ip e r M otor R e p l a c e m e n t .......................... 8-191
Tail/Turn Signal Lamp Replacement W ip e r T ra n s m is s io n R e p l a c e m e n t ...............8 -1 9 2
(Pickup, Suburban, Utility)........................ 8-159 W ip er M otor M o d ule R e p la c e m e n t.............. 8 -1 9 3
Wiper Chatter Repair ..... ...... ........ ......... ...8-194 Description and Operation ............................8-236
Windshield Glass Cleaning .................. ........ 8-194 Radio/Audio System Description..................8-236
Blade Element Cleaning ............................. ..8-194 Radio/Audio System Operation (UM7) ........8-236
Wiper Arm Replacement - Rear ......... ........8-194 Radio/Audio System Operation (UM6) ........8-237
Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear ...... .8-196 Radio/Audio System Operation (UNO).........8-239
Blade Element Replacement - Rear ...........8-197 Radio/Audio System Circuit Description ......8-244
Wiper Motor Replacement - R ear............. ..8-198
W iring Systems ............... .......................... .....8-245
Description and Operation ................ ...........8-198
Diagnostic Information and Procedures .... 8-245
Wiper/Washer System Circuit
Where to Find Electrical Schematics .......... 8-245
Description ..... ...........................................8-198
How to Use Electrical Diagnosis ................ 8-248
Rear Wiper/Washer System
Circuit Description....................... ..............8-199 How to Use Electrical Schematics.............. 8-249
How to Use Schematic
Entertainm ent ............................................ ..8-200 Reference Tables ................................ .....8-250
Specifications ................................................. 8-200 How to Use Schematic Icon Tables ........... 8-250
Fastener Tightening Specifications ..............8-200 How to Use Component
GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-200 Location Tables .........................................8-250
Schematic and Routing Diagrams .......... ...8-200 How to Use Component
Entertainment Schematic References .........8-200 Location Views ......................................... 8-251
Entertainment Schematic Icons .... ..............8-200 How to Use Connector End Views ............. 8-252
Radio/Audio System Schematics ................. 8-201 How to Use Diagnostic System Checks .... 8-252
Component Locator.................... ........ ...........8-205 How to Use Diagnostic Tables ....................8-252
Entertainment Components ......................... 8-205 How to Use Circuit Descriptions..................8-253
Entertainment Component Views................8-207 Truck Zoning..................................................8-254
Entertainment Connector End Views ..........8-211 Electrical Symbols.........................................8-255
Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-214 General Electrical Diagnosis
Radio/Audio System Check......................... 8-214 Procedures ............ ....................................8-259
Radio Memory Inoperative ...................... ....8-215 Symptom Diagnostic Example ......................8-259
Amplifier Inoperative.....................................8-215 Intermittents and Poor Connections
Radio Display Inoperative, No Diagnosis....................................................8-260
Sound from Speakers...................... ........ 8-216 Checking Aftermarket Accessories.............. 8-261
Radio Display and/or Buttons Do Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp ............. 8-261
Not Illuminate .................................... ....... 8-217 Troubleshooting with a Digital
Radio Display Does Not Dim with Multimeter................ ..................................8-262
IP Dimmer Switch ............................. ........ 8-217 Troubleshooting with a Short Finder ............8-262
Tape Player Inoperative ........... ................. ..8-218 Probing Electrical Connectors...................... 8-262
Tape Player Weak, Slow, or Using Connector Test Adapters...................8-262
Garbled Output.............. ....... ................... 8-218 Using Fused Jumper W ires......................... 8-262
Compact Disc Inoperative ........................... 8-219 Measuring Voltage ....................................... 8-263
Compact Disc Inoperative - Remote........... 8-219 Measuring Voltage Drop............................... 8-263
Testing for Continuity ....................... ............8-263
Antenna Diagnostic Check ...... ................... 8-221
Testing for Short to Ground ........................ 8-263
Speakers Inoperative - One ................. ...... 8-222
Testing for Electrical Intermittents............... 8-264
Repair Instructions ..................................... ...8-223
Wiring Repairs ..............................................8-264
Radio Replacement............................... ....... 8-223
Circuit Protection - Fuses.............................8-265
Amplifier Replacement ..................................8-224 Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers............ 8-265
Rear Seat Audio Control Replacement.......8-224 Circuit Protection - Fusible Links ................. 8-265
Cassette Player Care and Cleaning ........,..8-225 Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation ........... 8-265
Remote CD Player Replacement ................. 8-226 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips ....8-266
Remote CD Changer Replacement ............ 8-227 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice
Compact Disc Care and Cleaning .............. 8-227 Sleeves ......................................................8-268
Fixed Antenna Replacement............ ............8-228 Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable ............8-269
Antenna Extension Cable Replacement..... 8-228 Splicing Inline Harness Diodes.................... 8-270
Speaker Replacement HO2S Wiring Repairs................................... 8-270
(Front Side Door) ..... ...............................8-230 SIR Wiring Repairs .......................................8-270
Speaker Replacement Flat Wire Repairs..........................................8-273
(Front Door Armrest) ............ ................... 8-231 Connector Repairs .......................... .............8-273
Speaker Replacement (Rear) ...................... 8-232 Connector Position Assurance Locks.......... 8-273
Speaker Replacement (Side Door) ............. 8-234 Terminal Position Assurance Locks ............ 8-273
Speaker Replacement (Rear Overhead) .... 8-235 Push to Seat Connectors .............................8-273
Pull to Seat Connectors ......... ......................8-274 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
Weather Pack Connectors........................... 8-275 with UART Data Line ............................ ...8-381
Repairing Connector Terminals ................... 8-276 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
Schematic and Routing Diagrams ..............8-276 w/Class 2 Data Line ................. ................ 8-381
Power and Grounding Schematic Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
References ................................................8-276 w/E and C Data Line................................8-383
Power and Grounding Schematic Icons ......8-276 Repair Instructions ............................. ............8-384
Power Distribution Schematics ...................8-277 Camper and Trailer Wiring Description .......8-384
Auxiliary Battery Schematics ............ ..........8-286 Description and Operation ...................... .....8-385
Ground Distribution Schematics...................8-287 Power and Grounding Circuit
Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Outlets Description .......... ....... ........................... ...8-385
Schematics.............................................. ,.8-306 Data Link Communications Circuit
Upfitter Provision Schematics ................... ...8-307 Description ................................................8-385
Component Locator................. ,................. . ..8-312 Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Outlet Circuit
Power and Grounding Components ............8-312 Description ........................... ................... ..8-386
Power and Grounding Inline Harness Connector End Views .........8-387
Component Views ...................................... 8-333 Harness Routing View s.... ....... ................... 8-455
Power and Grounding Connector
Instrum ent Panel, Gauges and
End Views .... ......... .................................8-353
Console ................... ................. ....... 8-490
Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-358
Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Outlets Specifications ..................................................8-490
System Check ...........................................8-358 Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-490
Cigar Lighter Inoperative ....................... ..... .8-359 GM SPO Group Numbers ............................ 8-490
Auxiliary Outlets Inoperative ........................ 8-359 Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-491
Schematic and Routing Diagrams ............... 8-360 Instrument Cluster Schematic
Data Link Communications References .................................................8-491
Schematic References .............................. 8-360 Instrument Cluster Schematic Icons ........... 8-491
Data Link Communications Instrument Cluster: Analog Schematics .... .8-492
Schematic Icons .... ................. ................. 8-360 Component Locator......................... ......... ....8-499
Data Link Connector (DLC) Schematics .... 8-361 Instrument Cluster Components..... ........ ..,.8-499
Component Locator......................... .............. 8-362 Instrument Cluster Component Views .........8-504
Data Link Communications Components ....8-362 Visual Identification................................. ......8-514
Data Link Communications Instrument Cluster Connector
Component Views..................... ....... ........ 8-363 End Views .................................................. 8-514
Visual Identification................................ .......8-364 Diagnostic Information and Procedures.... 8-520
Data Link Communications Connector Instrument Cluster System Check .............. 8-520
End Views ............................... .................. 8-364
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge Always Cold ............. .................... 8-522
A Diagnostic System Check -
Engine Coolant Temperature
Data Link Communications .................... .8-365
Gauge Always H ot.................... ................8-523
Data Link Communications
System Check .................................. ........8-366 Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative ............. 8-523
DTC U1016 Loss of Communications
with PCM .... ............................................8-367 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always High (Diesel) ................................8-524
DTC U1016 Loss of Class 2
Communication with VCM .... ...................8-370 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always High (Gas).... .................. ....... ..... 8-524
DTC U1192 Loss of VTD Class 2
Serial Data Com ................ .................. .....8-373 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
DTC U1255 Serial Data Line Malfunction ...8-376 Always Low (Diesel) ................................. 8-525
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
with VCM/PCM Always Low (Gas) ..................................... 8-526
(Vehicle Control Module).......................... 8-378 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate or Inoperative (Diesel) .......... ................. ..8-526
with VCM/PCM Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate
(Powertrain Control Module).......... ...........8-379 or Inoperative (G as).... ............................. 8-527
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Empty
with EBCM............................. ................ ....8-379 (Dual Tank, Diesel)................................... 8-528
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
with Components ........................................8-380 Empty (Gas) .......................... ................... 8-529
Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Empty Fuse Block Replacement
(Single Tank, Diesel) ................. ...............8-529 (Convenience Center) .................... ...........8-573
Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Description and Operation .................... ....... 8-575
Full (Gas) .............................. .....................8-530 Instrument Panel Description.......................8-575
Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Full Gauge Description ........................................ 8-576
(Dual Tank Diesel)................. .................8-530 Indicator Description ...................................... 8-579
Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Full Instrument Cluster Description..................... 8-579
(Single Tank, Diesel) ............. ................ ..8-532
Instrument Cluster Operation.......................8-580
Volt Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative ........8-532
Fasten Safety Belt Indicator Always On .... 8-533 Instrument Cluster Circuit Description .........8-581
Fasten Safety Belt Indicator Inoperative .....8-533 Audible Warnings Description .......................8-583
Low Engine Coolant Indicator Audible Warnings Circuit Description ..........8-583
Always On (Diesel Only) ..................... .....8-534 Special Tools and Equipment .......................8-584
Low Engine Coolant Indicator
Keyless E n try .............................................. .....8-585
Inoperative (Diesel Only)............... ..........8-535
PRNDL Display Inaccurate or Specifications ...................................... ...........8-585
Inoperative (PRNDL Inoperative) .............8-536 GM SPO Group Numbers ................ .......... ,8-585
PRNDL Display Inaccurate or Schematic and Routing Diagrams ...............8-585
inoperative (PRNDL Inaccurate).............. 8-537 Keyless Entry Schematic References ......... 8-585
PRNDL Logic Input Test ............. ...... .........8-538 Keyless Entry Schematic Icons .......... ........ 8-585
Speedometer Inaccurate Keyless Entry Schematics ........................... 8-586
(J 38522 Unavailable) .................... ..........8-538
Component Locator ................................ ....... 8-591
Speedometer and/or Odometer
Inoperative ............................................. ..8-539 Keyless Entry Components ......................... 8-591
Tachometer Inaccurate.................................8-540 Keyless Entry Component Views ...... ....... ...8-595
Tachometer Inoperative (Gas) ..... ..............8-540 Keyless Entry Connector End Views ..........8-596
Tachometer Inoperative (Diesel) ..................8-541 Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-597
Schematic and Routing Diagrams ............. .8-542 Remote Keyless Entry System Check ..— 8-597
Audible Warnings Schematic References ...8-542 Remote Keyless Entry System
Audible Warnings Schematic Icons ..............8-542 Inoperative ................................................ 8-597
Audible Warnings Schematics ......................8-543 RKE System Does Not Change
Diagnostic information and Procedures .....8-544 Customization Modes................................ 8-598
A Diagnostic System Check - RKE System Does Not Program ................. 8-598
Audible Warnings.... ................ ......... .......8-544 Transmitter T est............ .................... .......... 8-599
Fasten Safety Belt Chime Always On .........8-544 Door Lock Inoperative with
Fasten Safety Belt Chime Inoperative ........8-545 Transmitter - A ll............................. ...........8-600
Key-in-lgnition Chime Inoperative ............... 8-546 Door Unlock Inoperative with
Key-in-lgn Chime On with LF Door Transmitter - A ll................. .......................8-600
Closed .................... ................................ ...8-547 Liftgate Window Release Inoperative
Overspeed Chime Inoperative ................... ..8-548 w/Transmitter ............................................ .8-601
Lights On Chime Inoperative ................. ......8-549 Door Lock/Unlock Inoperative - L F ............. 8-601
Repair Instructions..................................... ...8-550
Door Lock/Unlock Inop with
Bezel Replacement - IP Cluster ................. 8-550 Transmitter - Rear ........... .......... .............8-602
IP Cluster Replacement .......................... ....8-551
Courtesy Lamps Inoperative with
Instrument Cluster Lamp Replacement.......8-552 Transmitter .................................................8-602
Ashtray Replacement .............................. .....8-552
Repair Instructions .........................................8-603
Cupholder Replacement ...............................8-553
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
12 Volt Power Supply Replacement ...........8-554
Replacement................................... .......... 8-603
Accessory Switch Replacement..................,8-554
Transmitter Replacement............. ................ 8-603
Knee Bolster Replacement................ ......... 8-556
Compartment Replacement - IP ..................8-557 Transmitter Battery Replacement................. 8-604
Console Storage Bin Replacement............. 8-558 Transmitter Synchronization......................... 8-605
Console Replacement - Front Floor ........... 8-559 Transmitter Programming ....................... ...8-606
Cupholder Replacement - Description and Operation ................ .......... 8-606
Front Floor Console ..................... ............8-560 Remote Keyless Entry System
Compartment Replacement - Description .................................................8-606
IP Forward Extension .................. ...... ...... 8-561 Remote Keyless Entry System
IP Assembly - Rotating ......... .......................8-562 Operation ............ .............................. ....... 8-606
IP Carrier Replacement................................8-565 Remote Keyless Entry System
Fuse Block Replacement (Fuse Block) .......8-572 Circuit Description........... ............... ...........8-607
H o rn s ............................................................... ...8-609 DTC B3031 Security System
Specifications ............. ........ ................. ........ 8-609 Controller in Learn Mode ................ ........ 8-649
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-609 DTC B3033 Security System
GM SPO Group Numbers ...........................8-609 Indicates Tamper.......................................8-652
Schematic and Routing Diagrams ...............8-609 DTC C0559 EEPROM Checksum Error ......8-656
Horns Schematic References .............. ....... 8-609 Engine Cranks But Does Not Start............. 8-658
Horns Schematics ........................... ..............8-610 SECURITY Indicator Always On
Component Locator...... ......... ............... .......8-611 or Flashing .................................... ........... 8-662
Horns Components ............. ....... ................. 8-611 SECURITY Indicator Inoperative..................8-665
Horns Component Views..............................8-612 Repair Instructions.........................................8-668
Horns Connector End Views ..................... ..8-614 Theft Deterrent Module Replacement .........8-668
Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-614 PASSLOCK Reprogramming Seed
Horns System Check ........... .......... ........ ....8-614 and Key ............... ........ ............................8-669
Horns Inoperative..........................................8-615 PASSLOCK Reprogramming Auto Learn ....8-669
Horns Always O n ........................ .......... ...... 8-616 Programming Replacement Keys,
Repair Instructions.............. .......... ...............8-618 Ign Cyl, or PCM (Seed and K ey)............ 8-670
Horn Replacement ........................................ 8-618 Programming Replacement Keys,
Description and Operation .............. .............8-619 Ign Cyl, or PCM (Auto Learn) .... .............8-671
Horns Description............................ .............8-619 Description and Operation ............ ............... 8-672
Horns Circuit Description........... ......... ........ 8-619 Content Theft Deterrent (CTD)
Description .................................................8-672
Theft Deterrent .................................................8-620 Content Theft Deterrent (CTD)
Specifications ..................................................8-620 Operation ...................... ............................ 8-673
Scan Tool Data List ..................................... 8-620 Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD)
Scan Tool Data Definitions.......................... 8-620 Description .................................................8-674
GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-622 Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Operation ....8-675
Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-622 Special Tools and Equipment............. ........ 8-676
Theft Deterrent System Schematic
References ............... .................................8-622 Cruise Control ............... ..................................8-677
Theft Deterrent System Schematic Icons ....8-622 Specifications ..... ........................................... 8-677
Theft Deterrent System Schematics ............8-623 Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-677
Component Locator.................................. .....8-624 GM SPO Group Numbers ........... .......... .....8-677
Theft Deterrent System Components.......... 8-624 Schematic and Routing Diagrams .... ......... 8-677
Theft Deterrent System Cruise Control Schematic References ........8-677
Component Views ............................. ........8-625 Cruise Control Schematic Icons ..................8-677
Theft Deterrent System Connector Cruise Control Schematics (Gasoline) ........8-678
End View s....................... ................... ...... 8-626
Cruise Control Schematics (Diesel) ............ 8-680
Component Locator........................................8-681
Intermittents and Poor Connections............8-627
Cruise Control Components .............. ......... 8-681
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Displaying................................... ............... 8-627 Cruise Control Component Views............... 8-682
Scan Tool Diagnostics ............. ......... ......... 8-627 Cruise Control Connector End Views .........8-683
A Diagnostic System Check - Diagnostic Information and Procedures.... 8-684
Theft Deterrent .......................................... 8-628 Cruise Control System Check ..................... 8-684
Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Cruise Control Inoperative (Gasoline) ......... 8-685
System Check ........... ............................... 8-630 Cruise Control Inoperative (Diesel) ............. 8-689
DTC B0688 Security System Cruise Control Does Not Resume,
Indicator Circuit High ............. .................. 8-631 Accel, Tap Up or Down ............................8-692
DTC B2947 Security System Cruise Control Does Not Disengage
Sensor Power CKT Low ........................... 8-633 with Brake Pedal ........ ...............................8-693
DTC B2948 Security System
Repair Instructions........... ............................. 8-694
Sensor Power CKT High .................... .....8-636
DTC B2957 Security System Cruise Control Module Replacement ..........8-694
Sensor Data Circuit Low ............. .............8-639 Cruise Control Cable Replacement
DTC B2958 Security System (L30/L31/L35) ........................................... 8-695
Sensor Data Circuit High ......................... 8-642 Cruise Control Cable
DTC B2960 Sec Sys Sensor Replacement (L29) ......... .................. .......8-698
Data Incorrect but Valid ............................8-646 Cruise Control Cable Adjustment................. 8-702
Description and Operation ................. .......... 8-703 Grille Replacement (All Models) ..................8-731
Cruise Control System Description (G as)..... 8-703 Grille Replacement (C3500HD Only) ..........8-732
Cruise Control System Description Decal and Stripe Replacement............. ...... 8-732
(Diesel)............. ........... ........................... ..8-703 Washing and Waxing ....................................8-733
Cruise Control System Circuit Foreign Material Deposit Removal...............8-733
Description ............................ .................... 8-704 Cleaning Bright Metal Parts..........................8-733
Garage Door Opener .............. ....... ...............8-706 Description and Operation ..................... ...... 8-734
Specifications .............. ...................................8-706 Adhesive Retained Molding and
Emblem Description ......................... .........8-734
GM SPO Group Numbers ........................... 8-706
Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-706 W aterleaks........................ ................ ............... .8-735
Garage Door Opener Schematic Diagnostic Information and Procedures.... 8-735
References ........... ..................................... 8-706 Body Waterleak Repair ................................ 8-735
Garage Door Opener Schematic Icons.... .8-706 Waterleak Test Preparation ..........................8-736
Garage Door Opener Schematics............... 8-707 Generalized Testing ...................................... 8-737
Component Locator............................... ........ 8-708 Water Hose Test......................... ........ ........ 8-737
Garage Door Opener Components..... ....... 8-708 Air Hose Test ......................... ..................... 8-737
Garage Door Opener Component Views ....8-709 Dust Leaks ................ ....................................8-737
Garage Door Opener Connector Repair Instructions ......................................... 8-738
End Views ................... ...... ........................8-710 Body Waterleak Repair ................................8-738
Diagnostic Information and Procedures .... 8-711 Stationary Window Waterleak Repair.... ..... 8-739
Garage Door Opener System Check.......... 8-711
Garage Door Opener Inoperative ...............8-711 Air/Wind N o is e ................................................. 8-740
Garage Door Opener Does Not Transmit ......8-711 Diagnostic Information and Procedures .... 8-740
Repair Instructions ........................................8-712 Air/Wind Noise.............................................. 8-740
Garage Door Opener Module Tracing Powder or Chalk Test..................... 8-740
Replacement................................ ..............8-712 Air Pressure Test .......................................... 8-740
Garage Door Opener Programming - Soap Suds or Bubble Test.......................... 8-741
Universal ............ ....................................... 8-716 Repair Instructions ............. ...........................8-741
Description and Operation ........................... 8-716 Exterior Windnoise ........... ............................ 8-741
Garage Door Opener Description ............... 8-716 Interior Windnoise ............. ........................... 8-741
Garage Door Opener Operation .................. 8-716 Squeaks and R a ttle s .......................................8-742
Garage Door Opener Circuit Description ....8-717 Repair Instructions.........................................8-742
Exterior T r im ................ ....................................8-718 Noise Repair - Rear of Vehicle ...................8-742
Specifications ........... .................. ................... 8-718 Stationary W in d o w s ........................................8-743
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-718 Specifications ..................................................8-743
GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-718 GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-743
Repair Instructions.........................................8-719 Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-743
Emblem/Nameplate Repair.......................... 8-719
Stationary Windows Schematic
Molding Replacement - Front Wheel References .............. ................................. 8-743
Opening (Left) ........................................... 8-720 Defogger Schematics .......... .........................8-744
Molding Replacement - Front Wheel
Automatic Day-Night Mirrors Schematics ....8-746
Opening (Right) ................................... ..... 8-720
Component Locator..... ................................. 8-747
Wheel Opening Flare Replacement -
Front ......................................... ................ 8-721 Stationary Windows Components .............. .8-747
Molding Replacement - Stationary Windows Component Views.......8-749
Front Door Body Side...............................8-722 Stationary Windows Connector
Molding Replacement - End Views ................ ................................ 8-752
Rear Door Body Side ............................... 8-724 Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-755
Molding Replacement - Rear Quarter .........8-726 Defogger System Check ..............................8-755
Fender Protector Replacement....................8-727 Automatic Day-Night Mirrors System
Wheel Opening Flare Replacement - Check (Temperature) ................................ 8-755
Rear (Pickup) ................. .......................... 8-728 Automatic Day-Night Mirrors System
Wheel Opening Flare Replacement - Check (Mirror) ...........................................8-756
Rear (Suburban and Utility) ..................... 8-728 Defoggers Inoperative - Rear Window........8-756
Molding Replacement - Rocker Panel ........8-729 Defogger Lamp Switch Inoperative -
Molding Replacement - Rear Window ............................................8-757
Rear Panel (Rear Panel) ......................... 8-730 Defogger Grid Lines Diagnosis.................... 8-757
Molding Replacement - Rear Panel Mirrors - Automatic Day-Night
(Endgate) ........................... .......................8-730 Inoperative..................................................8-758
Mirrors - Automatic Day-Night Repair Instructions.... ............................. ......8-810
Does Not Change........................... ...... ...8-758 Outside Air Temp Sensor
Mirrors - Automatic Day-Night Replacement (Standard) ...........................8-810
Inop in Reverse...................... ...... ............8-759 Hood Bumper Replacement ........................ 8-811
Mirrors - Outside Automatic Hood Replacement .... ..................................8-812
Day-Night Inoperative ...............................8-759 Hood Hinge Replacement ............................8-813
Mirrors - Compass Inoperative Hood Link Replacement............. ................. 8-814
or Inaccurate .............................................8-760 Hood Latch Replacement (Primary)............ 8-815
Repair Instructions ......................................... 8-761 Hood Latch Replacement (Secondary) .......8-816
Rearview Mirror Replacement ..................... 8-761 Hood Latch Support Replacement.............. 8-816
Rearview Mirror Support Replacement .......8-762 Hood Latch Release Cable
Windshield Replacement .... .........................8-764 Replacement............................................ ..8-817
Body Side Stationary Window Hood Insulator Replacement ....................... 8-818
Replacement..................... .........................8-771 Fender Replacement - Front (Right) ...........8-819
Quarter Window Replacement............... .....8-777 Fender Replacement - Front (Left) ..... ....... 8-822
Hinged Body Side Window Replacement ....8-782 Radiator Support Replacement ....................8-824
Rear Window Replacement (Pickup) ..........8-782 Support Replacement - Sheet Metal...........8-829
Rear Window Replacement Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement.............. 8-829
(Utility With Cargo Door)..... .....................8-787 Seal Replacement - Hood Rear .................. 8-830
Window Replacement - Liftgate...................8-793 Wheelhouse Panel Replacement (Left) .......8-831
Window Polishing.......... ................... ............8-794 Wheelhouse Panel Replacement (Right).... 8-833
Grid Line Repair ........................................... 8-796 Splash Shield Replacement -
Rear Window Defogger Braided Wheelhouse..... ................. .......... .............8-835
Lead Wire ................................................. 8-796 Special Tools and Equipment................ .....8-836
Description and Operation ............................8-796
Adhesive Service Kit Description ................. 8-796 Doors...................... ........... .................... ............8-837
Short Method Description ................... ......... 8-796 Specifications ..................................................8-837
Extended Method Description.............. ....... 8-797 Fastener Tightening Specifications .............8-837
Stationary Window Description ............... ....8-797 GM SPO Group Numbers ............ ..............8-837
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-838
Description .............................................. ..8-797 Power Door Systems Schematic
Automatic Day-Night Mirrors Circuit References ................................................ 8-838
Description ................................................ 8-797 Power Door Systems Schematic Icons.......8-838
Compass Variance Setup Description.........8-798 Power Windows Schematics........................ 8-839
Compass Calibration Description ................ 8-798 Door Locks Schematics................................8-842
Magnetic Field Description ......................... .8-798 Outside Mirrors Schematics......................... 8-846
Mirror Function Description...........................8-799 Component Locator....................................... 8-849
Special Tools and Equipment ......................8-799 Power Door Systems Components............. 8-849
Power Door Systems Component Views ....8-853
Bumpers ............................................................. 8-800 Power Door Systems Connector
Specifications ............................................... .8-800 End Views .................................... .............8-860
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............ .8-800 Diagnostic Information and Procedures .....8-870
GM SPO Group Numbers ......................... ..8-800 Power Windows System Check ................... 8-870
Repair Instructions........................................ 8-801 Power Door Locks System Check.............. 8-870
License Bracket Replacement - Front.........8-801 Outside Mirrors System Check....................8-871
Air Deflector Replacement - Automatic Door Locks Inop,
Front Bumper Fascia ...............................8-801 Power Locks Operate .............................. 8-871
Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper ........ ..8-802 Power Windows Inoperative - A ll................ 8-872
Bumper Replacement - Front .............. ....... 8-803 Power Windows Inoperative - One .............8-873
Bumper Filler Replacement - Power Window Inoperative - LF
Front Center.......... ....................................8-805 (Pickup/2 Door Utility Only) .......................8-874
Bumper Filler Replacement - Power Window Inoperative - LF
Front Side .................................................. 8-805 (4 Door Utility/Suburban Only) ................ 8-875
Step Pad Replacement - Rear Bumper......8-806 Power Window Inoperative - R F ..................8-876
Bumper Replacement - R ear....................... 8-807 Power Windows Inoperative .........................8-877
Power Window Inoperative - RH ................. 8-878
Body Front E n d .................................... ...........8-809 Power Door Locks Switch
Specifications .............................................. ...8-809 Inoperative - One .....................................8-879
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-809 Power Door Locks Inoperative
GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-809 (4 Door Utility/Suburban)........... ...............8-879
Power Door Locks Inoperative Door Handle Bracket Replacement -
(Pickup/2 Door Utility) ............................... 8-881 Inside ......................................................... 8-918
Power Door Locks Switch Door Handle Replacement -
Inoperative- R ear............. ...... ......... ........ 8-883 Rear Inside............. .................. ................8-919
Power Door Locks Inoperative - Lock Replacement - Front Door .... ...... ......8-920
One Motor ................................ ................ 8-884 Lock Replacement - Rear Door.............. ....8-922
Power Mirrors Inoperative ...................... .....8-884 Lock Cylinder Replacement - Door............. 8-922
Power Mirrors Inop in Left/Right Binding Lock Cylinders................................. 8-923
Direction - LH ............................................8-885 Latch Replacement - Door
Power Mirrors Inop in Up/Down (Cargo Lower) .... ...................................... 8-924
Direction - LH ................................ ........ ...8-885 Latch Replacement - Door
Power Mirrors Inop in Left/Right (Cargo Upper) ..................................... .....8-925
Direction - RH ................ ........ ..................8-886 Latch Replacement - Door (Upper)..............8-927
Power Mirrors Inop in Up/Down Latch Replacement - Door (Lower) ..............8-928
Direction - RH ............................. ..............8-886 Striker Replacement - Door (Front Door) ....8-929
Heated Mirrors Inoperative ................... ......8-887 Striker Replacement - Door (Rear Door) ....8-930
Heated Mirrors Inoperative - LH ............... ..8-887 Door Hardware Lubrication ........................... 8-930
Heated Mirrors Inoperative - RH .................8-888 Door Module Replacement - Front ....... ......8-931
Repair Instructions ..........................................8-889 Wiring Harness Replacement -
Power Accessory Switch Panel Door (Rear Cargo Door) ...........................8-932
Replacement....................... ...... ................8-889 Wiring Harness Replacement -
Rear Door Power Window Switch Door (Front Door) .....................................8-933
Replacement.............................................. 8-890 Wiring Harness Replacement -
Power Door Lock Switch Replacement .......8-891 Door (Rear Door) .......................... ............8-935
Ashtray Replacement ........... ....... ................8-892 Window Regulator Replacement -
Armrest Bracket Replacement .....................8-892 Front Door ........... .................. ........ ....... ...8-936
Door Handle Bezel Replacement Window Regulator Replacement -
(Front Door)................................................8-893 Rear Door ............... ...... ...........................8-937
Door Handle Bezel Replacement Window Regulator Handle
(Rear Door) .............. .................................8-894 Replacement - Door (Front Door) ..... ..... 8-938
Trim Panel Replacement - Map Pocket.... .8-894 Window Regulator Handle
Replacement - Door (Rear Door) .............8-939
Trim Panel Replacement - Upper
Extension .............. ........ ...........................8-895 Window Replacement - Front Door ........... .8-940
Window Replacement - Rear Door............. 8-942
Trim Panel Replacement-
Side Front Door.........................................8-896 Window Run Channel Replacement
(Front Door)............................................. ..8-944
Trim Panel Replacement -
Window Run Channel Replacement
Side Rear Door .............................. ......... 8-898
(Rear Door) ..... ................. ....................... 8-945
Water Deflector Replacement -
Sealing Strip Replacement - Outer Belt ......8-945
Front Door......................... ........................8-899
Sealing Strip - Front Door Window
Water Deflector Replacement - Belt Outer...................... ...........................8-946
Rear Door .............. ...................................8-900
Sealing Strip - Side Front Door
Door Adjustment ........................................... 8-900 Bottom Auxiliary............. ....... ................. .8-947
Door Replacement ........... .......................... ..8-901 Weatherstrip Replacement - Door ..... ........ 8-947
Door Replacement - Front...........................8-902 Weatherstrip Replacement -
Door Replacement - Rear ........................... 8-905 Front Door Window.......................... ........ 8-948
Hinge Replacement - Door Weatherstrip Replacement -
(Cargo Door) ..... ........................... ...........8-907 Rear Door Window................................... 8-949
Hinge Replacement - Door Weatherstrip Replacement -
(Access Door) ................................... ..... ...8-908 Side Door Opening ...................... .............8-949
Hinge Replacement - Front Door ................ 8-910 Mirror Replacement.... ........ ....... ................. 8-950
Hinge Replacement - Rear Door.................8-912 Mirror Replacement - Manual ...................... 8-951
Door Check Link Replacement.............. .....8-915 Mirror Face Replacement............................ 8-952
Door Handle Replacement - Pressure Relief Valve Replacement ..... .....8-953
Front Outside ..................... .......................8-915 Description and Operation ............................8-954
Door Handle Replacement - Door Description .......... ................................ 8-954
Rear Outside.............................................8-917 Power Windows Operation ...........................8-954
Door Handle Replacement - Inside.............8-918 Power Windows Circuit Description .............8-955
Door Outside Rearview Mirrors Repair Instructions .........................................8-991
Description ............................................ . ..8-956 Seat Replacement - Bench .........................8-991
Power Door Locks Operation ...................... 8-956 Seat Replacement - Split Bench .................8-992
Power Door Locks Circuit Description ........8-956 Seat Replacement - Front Bucket .............. 8-992
Power Mirrors Circuit Description ............... 8-956 Seat Cushion Frame Replacement -
Heated Mirror Circuit Description.................8-957 Front (Bucket).......................................... .8-995
Special Tools and Equipment...................... 8-957 Seat Cushion Frame Replacement -
Front (Split Bench) ................................... 8-997
R o o f..................................................................... 8-958 Seat Cushion Frame Replacement -
Specifications .......................................... ....... 8-958 Front (Bench Seat) ................................... 8-999
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-958 Seat Cushion Trim Cover and
GM SPO Group Numbers ............. ..............8-958 Pad Replacement (Bucket)..................... 8-1000
Repair Instructions ...................................... ...8-959 Seat Cushion Trim Cover and
Luggage Carrier Replacement Pad Replacement (Split Bench) ............ 8-1001
(2 Door Utility)........................................... 8-959 Seat Cushion Trim Cover and
Luggage Carrier Replacement Pad Replacement (Bench Seat) ............ 8-1002
(4 Door Utility/Suburban)...........................8-961 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Description and Operation ............................8-964 Replacement - Front (Bucket) ............... 8-1003
Luggage Carrier Description ....................... .8-964 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Seats ................................................................... 8-965 Replacement - Front (Split Bench) ........8-1004
Specifications ..................................................8-965 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Fastener Tightening Specifications ............. 8-965 Replacement - Front (Bench Seat)........8-1005
GM SPO Group Numbers ............................8-965 Seat Back Frame Replacement -
Schematic and Routing Diagrams .............. 8-967 Front (Bucket).......................................... 8-1006
Power Seat Systems Schematic Seat Back Frame Replacement -
References .................................................8-967 Front (Split Bench).................................. 8-1007
Power Seat Systems Schematic icons .......8-967 Seat Back Frame Replacement -
Power Seats Schematics..............................8-968 Front (Bench Seat) ........... ......................8-1008
Lumbar Support Schematics........................ 8-969 Seat Back Recliner Handle
Replacement - Front (Bucket) ................ 8-1009
Heated Seats Schematics ............................8-972
Component Locator........................................ 8-974 Seat Back Recliner Handle
Replacement - Front (Split Bench) ........8-1011
Power Seat Systems Components ............. 8-974
Seat Back Recliner Handle
Power Seat Systems Component Views.... 8-977
Replacement - Front (Bench Seat)........8-1013
Power Seat Systems Connector
Lumbar Pump Replacement ...................... 8-1013
End View s..................................................8-980
Lumbar Switch Replacement (Power) .......8-1014
Diagnostic Information and Procedures.... 8-983
Lumbar Switch Replacement (Manual)..... 8-1015
Power Seats System Check........................ 8-983
Lumbar Switch Replacement
Lumbar Support System Check...................8-983
(Power Split Bench) ................................8-1015
Heated Seats System Check ......................8-983
Lumbar Switch Replacement
Power Seat Adjuster .................................. ..8-983 (Manual Split Bench) ............. ................ 8-1016
Power Seat Adjuster Horizontal Lumbar Switch Replacement
Chuck or Looseness.................................8-984 (Power Bench Seat)............... ................8-1017
Power Seat Adjuster Does Not Lumbar Bladder Replacement
Move Horizontally ............................... ...... 8-984 (Non-Removal Seat) ...............................8-1017
Power Seat Adjuster Does Not Lumbar Bladder Replacement
Move Vertically .......................................... 8-984 (Removable Seat) ............. ................. ....8-1018
Power Seat Adjuster Inoperative .................8-984 Lumbar Bladder Replacement
Power Seat Does Not Move (Non-Removable Seat Back Panel) .......8-1019
Forward/Rearward........................ ....... ..... 8-985 Lumbar Bladder Replacement
Power Seat Does Not Tilt Forward............. 8-985 (Split Bench)............................................8-1019
Power Seat Does Not Tilt Rearward .......... 8-986 Lumbar Bladder Replacement
Lumbar Support Does Not Deflate ............. 8-986 (Bench Seat) ........................... ...............8-1020
Lumbar Support Does Not Inflate............... 8-987 Seat Riser Trim Cover Replacement -
Heated Seat Inoperative............................... 8-988 Power (Ext Cab, Utility) ......................... 8-1021
Seat - Manual Adjuster Does Seat Riser Trim Cover Replacement -
Not Unlock .................................................8-990 Power (Bucket ) .......................................8-1021
Seat - Manual Adjuster Does Not Lock..... 8-990 Seat Riser Trim Cover Replacement -
Seat - Hard to Move Forward and Power (Split Bench, All) ......................... 8-1022
Rearward.................................................... 8-990 Seat Riser Replacement (Utility)............... 8-1023
Seat Riser Replacement Seat Cushion Cover and Pad
(Extended Cab) ..................... .......... ...... 8-1024 Replacement - Rear (Extended Cab) ....8-1059
Seat Riser Replacement (Crew Cab)........8-1025 Seat Cushion Cover and Pad
Seat Riser Replacement (Suburban).........8-1026 Replacement - Rear (Crew C ab)..... .....8-1060
Seat Adjuster Replacement- Seat Cushion Cover and Pad
Front (Manual) ........................................8-1027 Replacement - Rear (Suburban) ........... 8-1061
Seat Adjuster Replacement - Seat Back Cover and Pad
Front (Power) ................. ....... ........ ........ 8-1030
Replacement - Rear (Utility) ................... 8-1062
Seat Adjuster Replacement -
Front (Split Bench).... ................. ........ ...8-1031 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Seat Adjuster Replacement - Replacement - Rear (Extended Cab) ....8-1063
Front (Bench Seat) .............. .................. 8-1032 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Seat Adjuster Track Cover Replacement - Rear (Crew C ab)...........8-1064
Replacement - Front............................... 8-1033 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Seat Adjuster Motor Replacement - Rear (Suburban 40%) ....8-1065
Replacement - Front ............................... 8-1034 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Rear (Suburban 60%) ....8-1066
Replacement - Front............................... 8-1035 Seat Back Cover and Pad
Heated Seat Switch Replacement - Rear
Replacement - Rear................ ............... 8-1037 (Suburban 2nd Rear)............................... 8-1067
Seat Back Heater Replacement - Front ....8-1037 Seat Back Replacement -
Seat Cushion Heater Rear (Utility) ............... ............................ 8-1069
Replacement - Front........... ................... 8-1038 Seat Back Replacement - Rear
Heater Module Replacement ............. ....... 8-1039 (Extended Cab) ................................ ...... 8-1070
Headrest Replacement - Seat Back Replacement - Rear
Front Seat (Bucket) .............................. .,8-1039 (Crew C a b ).............................................. 8-1072
Headrest Replacement - Seat Back Replacement - Rear
Front Seat (Split Bench) ........... ......... ...8-1040 (Suburban)................. ............................. 8-1073
Headrest Replacement - Seat Back Frame Replacement -
Front Seat (Bench Seat) ............... ........ 8-1041 Rear (Utility) ........................... ................ 8-1075
Bucket Seat Headrest Bushing Seat Back Frame Replacement -
Replacement (Bucket) ...................... ...... 8-1042 Rear (Extended Cab) ............................. .8-1076
Replacement (Split Bench).... ................ 8-1043 Rear (Crew Cab) ........................ ............8-1078
Replacement (Bench Seat) ................ ...8-1043 Rear (Suburban) ..................................... 8-1079
Headrest Retainer Replacement - Seat Back Cover Replacement -
Front Seat (Bucket) ................................ 8-1044 Rear Folding................................... ........8-1080
Headrest Retainer Replacement - Seat Support Cover Replacement -
Front Seat (Split Bench) ........................ 8-1045 Rear Folding............................................ 8-1081
Headrest Retainer Replacement -
Armrest Replacement - Rear Seat............ 8-1081
Front Seat (Bench) ................................. 8-1045
Headrest Replacement -
Armrest Replacement -
Front Seat (Bucket) ................................ 8-1046 Rear Seat (Utility) ........................ ...........8-1082
Armrest Replacement - Front Seat Headrest Replacement -
(Split Bench and Bench Seat)............... 8-1047 Rear Seat (Extended Cab)..................... 8-1083
Seat Replacement - Rear (Suburban).......8-1048 Headrest Replacement -
Rear Seat (Crew Cab) ................. .......... 8-1084
Seat Replacement - Rear (Crew C ab )..... 8-1049
Seat Replacement - Rear (Utility).............8-1050
Rear Seat (Suburban 40%) ....................8-1085
Seat Replacement - Rear Bench ...............8-1052
Seat Cushion Frame Replacement - Rear Seat (Suburban 60%) .................... 8-1086
Rear (Utility) ............................................8-1053
Seat Cushion Frame Replacement -
Rear Seat (Suburban).............................8-1087
Rear (Extended Cab) ..............................8-1054
Headrest Retainer Replacement -
Seat Cushion Frame Replacement -
Rear S e a t................................................ 8-1089
Rear (Crew Cab) .................................... 8-1055
Seat Cushion Frame Replacement - Description and Operation ......................... 8-1090
Rear (Suburban) ..................................... 8-1056 Power Seat Systems Operation................ 8-1090
Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Power Seats Circuit Description ............... 8-1090
Replacement - Rear (Utility)...................8-1058 Power Lumbar Operation .......................... 8-1090
Power Lumbar Circuit Description............. 8-1091 Trim Panel Replacement -
Heated Seats Description..................... ..... 8-1091 Rear Quarter (Pickup)............................ 8-1120
Heated Seats Circuit Description .............. 8-1091 Trim Panel Replacement -
Special Tools and Equipment .................... 8-1091 Rear Quarter (Extended Cab) ............... 8-1121
Trim Panel Replacement -
Interior Trim .................................................... 8-1092 Rear Quarter (Crew Cab) ............... ...... 8-1122
Specifications .......... .................................. ..8-1092 Trim Panel Replacement -
Fastener Tightening Specifications........... .8-1092 Rear Quarter (Suburban) ....................... 8-1122
GM SPO Group Numbers ............. ........ ...8-1092 Trim Panel Replacement -
Repair Instructions .................... .................. 8-1093 Rear Quarter (Utility)...............................8-1126
Door Sill Plate Replacement.................. ....8-1093 Trim Panel Replacement -
Carpet Replacement - Front (Pickup) .......8-1094 Rear Quarter Lower (Pickup) ............. ...8-1128
Carpet Replacement - Trim Panel Replacement -
Front (Suburban) .................... ......... ...... 8-1095 Rear Quarter Lower (Extended C ab ).... 8-1128
Carpet Replacement - Front (Utility) .........8-1098 Trim Panel Replacement -
Headliner Replacement (Pickup)............... 8-1101 Rear Quarter Lower
Headliner Replacement (Extended Cab w/Rear Seat) ................8-1129
(Extended Cab) .......................................8-1101 Trim Panel Replacement -
Headliner Replacement (Crew Cab) .........8-1102 Rear Quarter Lower
Headliner Replacement (Utility)..................8-1103 (Extended Cab w/o Rear Seat) ..............8-1130
Headliner Replacement (Suburban) .......... 8-1104 Cleaning Vinyl Trim ................. ................... 8-1131
Assist Handle Replacement (Suburban) ....8-1105 Spot Cleaning Fabric Trim ............... ......... 8-1131
Cleaning Agents............ ............................. 8-1131
Assist Handle Replacement
(3rd Door Pickup) ................................... 8-1106 Basic Steps Before Cleaning..................... 8-1131
Assist Handle Replacement Cleaning of Fabric Trim ................ ....... .....8-1131
(4 Door Utility) ......................................... 8-1106 Cleaning Glass Surfaces ........................ ...8-1132
Assist Handle Replacement (Pickup) ........8-1107 Removal of Specific Stains........................8-1132
Assist Handle Replacement Weatherstrip Lubrication ............................8-1132
(Extended Cab Pickup) .......................... 8-1108 Body Rear E n d ........................... ......... ........ 8-1133
Coat Hook Replacement ................ .......... 8-1108 Specifications ................. .......... ..................8-1133
Console Replacement - Overhead............8-1109 Fastener Tightening Specifications............ 8-1133
Sunshade Replacement..............................8-1110 GM SPO Group Numbers .......................... 8-1133
Garnish Molding Replacement - Schematic and Routing Diagrams ............ 8-1134
Windshield Pillar ............. ......... ......... ....8-1110 Body Rear End Schematic References.... 8-1134
Garnish Molding Replacement - Release Systems Schematics.................. ,8-1135
Center Pillar (Suburban) ............. .......... 8-1111 Component Locator........................ .............8-1136
Garnish Molding Replacement - Body Rear End Components .................. ...8-1136
Center Pillar (Crew Cab)........................ 8-1112 Body Rear End Component Views ........... 8-1137
Garnish Molding Replacement - Body Rear End Connector End Views ......8-1140
Center Pillar (Utility)............................... .8-1113
Diagnostic Information and
Garnish Molding Replacement - Upper .....8-1114 Procedures ..................................... 8-1141
Garnish Molding Replacement -
Endgate Window Release
Rear Door Upper................................. ...8-1114
System Check .........................................8-1141
Molding Replacement -
Endgate Window Release Inoperative ..... 8-1141
Rear Window Upper
(Pickup, Extended, Crew Cab) ..............8-1115 Repair Instructions .......................................8-1143
Molding Replacement - Rear Latch Replacement - Liftgate.............. ......8-1143
Window Upper (Suburban and Utility) ...8-1116 Trim Panel Replacement -
Molding Replacement - Rear Door (Pickup or Utility) ..................8-1144
Rear Window Upper Trim Panel Replacement -
(Standard Pickup and Crew Cab).......... 8-1116 Rear Door (Utility)................................... 8-1144
Molding Replacement - Water Deflector Replacement....................8-1145
Rear Window Upper Jack and Tool Stowage (Suburban)..........8-1145
(Extended Cab Pickup) .......................... 8-1117 Jack and Tool Stowage
Molding Replacement - (Pickup and Crew Cab) ......................... 8-1147
Rear Window Lower .... ..........................8-1118 Jack and Tool Stowage
Auxiliary Door Lock Switch (Extended Cab) ...................................... 8-1149
Replacement...........................................8-1118 Jack and Tool Stowage (2 Door)...............8-1151
Carpet Replacement - Rear Panel .............8-1119 Jack and Tool Stowage (4 Door).........,....8-1153
Trim Panel Replacement - Hinge Pillar.... 8-1120 Door Protector Replacement - Rear .........8-1154
Window Garnish Molding Replacement .....8-1155 Plastic Panel Information and Repair .....8-1191
Door Replacement - Rear .................. ....... 8-1155 Specifications ........................... ................ ...8-1191
Door Adjustment - Rear ............................8-1156 Repair Materials - Flexible Plastic Part .....8-1191
Endgate Replacement (Pickup) ........... ...... 8-1157 Repair Materials - Rigid Plastic Part....... ..8-1191
Endgate Replacement (Utility) ................... 8-1158 Repair Instructions ............................ ......... .8-1192
Hinge Replacement - Door .........................8-1158 Plastic Panels .............. ..............................8-1192
Hinge Replacement - Endgate Window ....8-1159 General Plastic Repair Instructions ...........8-1192
Hinge Replacement - Endgate.............. ....8-1160 Gouge or Puncture Repair ..................... ...8-1193
Torque Rod Replacement - Panel Replacement - Partial.... ...... ...........8-1197
Rear Compartment Lid ............................8-1161 Panel Replacement - Complete.................8-1201
Check Link Replacement - Rear Door......8-1161 Backing Patch Fabrication .........................8-1202
Access Hole Cover Replacement - Plastic Structure Repair ......... .................. .8-1208
Rear Door ................................................8-1162 Description and Operation ........... ..............8-1215
Lock Rod and Outside Handle How to Identify Plastic Parts ......................8-1215
Replace - Rear Door ..............................8-1163 Plastic Identification and Refinishing
Latch Control Handle Replacement - Systems .................... ........... ......... ........ 8-1215
Left Rear Door......................................... 8-1164 Handling Precautions For Plastic.............. 8-1217
Handle Replacement - Plastic Repair Precautions...................... ...8-1217
Endgate (Pickup) .....................................8-1165
Handle Replacement - P aint/C oating s............. ...................................8-1218
Endgate (Utility) .......................................8-1166 Specifications ................................................ 8-1218
Linkage Replacement - Endgate............... 8-1166 Clearcoat Repair Specifications -
Latch Replacement - Endgate ...................8-1167 3M Products ............................................ 8-1218
Latch Replacement - Door Clearcoat Repair Specifications -
(Door Lower) .................................. ........ 8-1168 Meguiar Products.....................................8-1219
Latch Replacement - Door Introduction.................................................... 8-1220
(Door Upper) ............................................8-1170 Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems ........... 8-1220
Lock Replacement - Rear Door.................8-1171 Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair........8-1220
Lock Actuator Replacement - Door........... 8-1172 Paint Identification.......................................8-1223
Bumper Replacement - Rear Door ........... 8-1173 Repair Instructions .......................................8-1223
Lock Striker Replacement - Clearcoat Repair w/o Repainting .............. 8-1223
Endgate (Pickup) .................................... 8-1174 Environmental Fallout (Acid Rain)............. 8-1224
Lock Striker Replacement - Paint Gauges ........................ ......................8-1225
Endgate (Utility Adjustment) ...................8-1175 Clearcoat Thickness.................................. .8-1225
Window Striker Replacement - Rail Dust Damage Repair ......................... 8-1225
Endgate................................ ................... 8-1175
Door Striker Replacement - Left Rear ...... 8-1176 Frame and U nderb o d y.... ............................ 8-1226
Door Striker Replacement - Specifications ............................................... 8-1226
Body Mounted R ear................................ 8-1177 Fastener Tightening Specifications............ 8-1226
Window Support Replacement - GM SPO Group Numbers ......................... 8-1226
Endgate.................................................... 8-1177 Yield Strength of Different Metals............. 8-1226
Wiring Harness Replacement - Door ........8-1178 Welding Table ......................... ....................8-1226
Pickup Box Replacement .......................... 8-1180 Electrode Table........................................... 8-1227
Fender Replacement - Stepside ............... 8-1181 Plug Weld Table ......................................... 8-1227
Fender Replacement - Diagnostic Information and Procedures ...8-1228
Rear Dual Wheel .................................... 8-1186 Alignment Checking.................................... 8-1228
Garnish Molding Replacement - Checking Frame Alignment........................ 8-1228
Liftgate .....................................................8-1187 Frame Conditions........................................8-1229
Weatherstrip Replacement - Endgate .......8-1187 Frame Conditions - Sag .............................8-1232
Weatherstrip Replace - Frame Conditions - Buckle........................ 8-1233
Rear Compartment Opening ................... 8-1188 Frame Conditions - Sidesway.................... 8-1234
Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door ....8-1189 Frame Conditions - Diamond..................... 8-1234
Description and Operation ......................... 8-1190 Frame Conditions - Twist .......................... 8-1234
Liftgate Window Release Circuit Frame Conditions - Improper Tracking .... 8-1235
Description............................................... 8-1190 Frame Conditions - Cracks in
Web of Rails ........................................... 8-1235
Repair instructions ........................................ 8-1236 Description and Operation ......................... 8-1254
Frame Straightening Description ............... 8-1236 Datum Description.......................................8-1254
Body Mount Replacement Centerline Description ................................ 8-1254
(Extended Cab) .......................................8-1237 Vertical Body Zero Line..............................8-1255
Body Mount Replacement Repairing Cracks Description ......... ............8-1255
(2 Door Utility) ............................... ....... ..8-1239 Welding Description................................. ...8-1255
Body Mount Replacement (Pickup)........... 8-1241 Running Board Description.......................8-1256
Body Mount Replacement (Crew Cab) .... 8-1243 Frame and Underbody Description ...........8-1256
Body Mount Replacement Frame Conditions Description....................8-1256
(4 Door Utility) ..... ...................................8-1245 Minimizing Frame Service Description ..... 8-1257
Body Mount Replacement (Suburban) ......8-1247
Trailer Hitch Replacement ............. ............1248
Tow Hook Replacement ............................ .8-1250
Engine Protection Shield Replacement .....8-1250
Running Board Replacement..................... 8-1251
Damaged Cage Nut Service...................... 8-1252
Lighting Systems
Specificatio ns
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Specification
Application Metric Sngll;^"'
Cargo/Stoplamp Mounting Screws 2 N-m 17 Ib in
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Mounting Screws 2 N-m 17 !b in
Head Clamping Screw "3 N-m 271b in
Mounting Bracket Screws 15 N-m 11-lb ft
Bulb Usage
Light Quantity
lumens/meter2
Lamp or Bulb Trade Number (footcandle) PICKUP CREWCAB UTILITY SUBURBAN
Instrument Panel Lights
ABS Warning — —
Indicator 74 0.7 1 1
Brake
Warning
Indicator 74 0.7 1 1 1 1
Charging
System
Indicator
Lamp 74 0.7 1 1 1 1
Check Gages
Indicator 74 0.7 1 1 1 1
Daytime
Running
Lights
Indicator 74 07 1 1 - 1 1
Directional
Signal
Indicator 74 0.7 2 2 2 2
Headlamp
Beam
Indicator 74 0.7 1 1 1 1
Instrument
Cluster
Illuminating
Lamps 194 0.2 4 4 4 4
instrument
Cluster
Illuminating
Lamps w/
Tachometer 194 0.2 6 6 6 6
Low
—
Coolant Lamp 74 0.7 1 1
Malfunction
Indicator
(SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON) 74 0.7 1 1 i 1
Bulb Usage (cont’d)
Light Quantity
lumens/meter2
Malfunction
Indicator
(SERVICE
THROTTLE
SOON) 74 0.7 ! 1 1 1
Safety Belt
Warning 74 0.7 1 1 1 1
Service Fuel
Filter Lamp 74 0.7 1 1 — —
Transmission
Indicator
(PRNDL) 161 1 1 1 1 1
Upshift
Indicator 74 0.7 1 1 1
—
Wait Lamp 74 0.7 l . 1 — —
Interior Lights
Ashtray 194 2 1 1 1 1
Courtesy
Lamp 1003 15 2 2 2
Dome Lamps 211-2 12 1 2 2 2 .
Four Wheel
Drive
Indicator 161 1 1 1 1 1
Four Wheel
Drive
Shift Lever 194 1 1 1 1 1
Heater or A/C
Control Lamp 194 2 1 1 1 1
Instrument
Panel
Compartment
Lamp 194 2 1 1 1 1
Reading
Lamps 211-2 12 2 4 4 4
Roof Console
Lamp 168 3 — 2 2 2
Sunshade
Vanity Mirror 74 0.7
— 4 4 4
Exterior Lights
Backup Lamp 3156 32 2 2 2 2
Backup Lamp
(Cab/Chassis 1156 32 2 2 — —
Only)
Center
High-Mounted
Stoplamp 921 32 1 1 " — —
Bulb
Fender
Clearance 194 2 4 4 — —
Lamp
Fog Lamp H3 115 2 — — —
Bulb Usage (cont’d)
Light Quantity
lumens/meter2
Front
194 2 2 2 2 2
Marker Lamp
Front Park
and 2375NA 30/2 4 4 4 4
Turn Lamp
Power Rating
at 12.8 V, — ■ ■— ■ — - — ■ .
Watts
Headlamps:
2 Headlamp H6054 35/65 2 2 2 .; 2
System
Headlamps:
4 Headlamp 9006 55 2 2 2 2
System
Candle Power — — — — ■— —
License 194 2 ■ 2 2 2 2
Plate Lamp
...Rear Park,
Stop, and
Turn Lamp 1157 32-3 2 2 — ' .'
(Cab/Chassis
Only)
Rear 3057 32-2 2 2 2 2
Parking Lamp
Rear Stop
and 3057 32-2 2 2 2 2
Turn Lamp
Reel Lamp 232 10 1 1 1 1
Roof 194 2 5 5 — 5
Marker Lamp
Underhood 93 1 1 1 1
15
Lamp
GM SPO Group Numbers
Application GM SPO Group Numl •
Cargo Lamp Switch 9.988
Daytime Running Lamp Module 2.485
Door Jamb Switch 16.494
Emergency Vehicle Roof Lamp Switch 2.575
Fog Lamp Switch 2.485
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp 2.575
Front Side Marker Lamp 2 75/
Headlamp 2.725
Headlamp Auto Control Module 2.485
Headlamp Capsule 2.725
Headlamp Switch 2.485
Lamp/Dome 16.494
Lamp/Dome — Bracket 16.494
Lamp/Dome — Harness 16.495
Lamp/Dome — Lamp with Reading 16.494
Lamp/High Mounted Stop 2.679
Lamp/IP Compartment 16.110
Lamp/Dome — Lens 16.495
Lamp/Underhood 8.890
Lamp/Rear Fender Clearence 2.575
Lamp/Rear License 2.700
Spotlamp 9.773
Taillamp 2.679
Schematic and Routing Diagrams
Lighting Systems Schematic References
Section Number - Subsection
Reference on Schematic Name
Automatic Day/Night Mirrors Cell - 148 8 - Stationary Windows
Backup Lights Cell - 112 8 - Lighting Systems
Cruise Control Cell - 34 6 - Engine Controls
Exterior Lights Cell 110 8 - Lighting Systems
Fog Lights Cell - 103 8 - Lighting Systems
Ground Distribution Ceil - 14 8 - Wiring Systems
Interior Lights Cell - 114 8 - Lighting Systems
Interior Lights Dimming Cell - 117 8 - Lighting Systems
Power Distribution Cell - 10 8 - Wiring Systems
Lighting Systems Schematic Icons

icon Icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice in Cautions and Notices.
330402
8-20
r Underhood
Lighting Systems_____________________________________________________________________
I Power
Distribution Fuse Block
Cel! 10
5 RED 42
A6 < C100 0
Power 5 RED 5 RED* 42
Distribution >S205
CelllO 42 3 RED 42
^Headlamp
J
/
1Ancl Panel
“ 1Dimmer -•ip
K T ! switch 1Cluster
0 High Beam
! a Indicator 1A
l .4 — .! Instrument U<A
G Cluster
1 YEL 10 I Cell 81
E13 J, C266
1 YEL 10 1 LT GRN 11 '.0.5 BLK/WHT 451
D
1 Headlamp ' S215 <
LO hi1Dimmer
, ------p..#-— | I Switch 1 BLK/WHT 451
«-4i.______ i j
A cK F .C200
1 TAN 12
1 LT GRN 11 € SP101
E12I E11 C266 1 BLK/WHT 451
S103 : Ground
1 LT GRN 11 Distribution
Cell 14
S225 ■
^PIOO | Gas O n ly " |^ 0.8 BLK/WHT 451
Diesel Only
1 LT GRN 11
1 TAN 12
F C102 S102 <
1 BLK/WHT 451
1 TAN 12 1 BLK/WHT 451
1 LT GRN 11 l G103 (Gas) J ■ G104
v v
S120 S121
Body and Accessories __________________________________________________________
491531
0
C102
8-22
lHot At All Times I |Hot In RUN, Bulb Test And START | Daytime
e- Ground
Lamp
'Power ^ ... ..■■■■4 f - ---------- —► Power 1IP H,
Lighting Systems
*Distribution F4 I h r l -FO G H8 L GAUGES Distribution * FllSe =7< Output Relay Module
I Cell 10 P pU86 -jg P Fuse 4 Cell 10 I B lo c k
i G 3> 20 A J7 | 10A i =§< e- Lamp Feed
L — — — — -S '— — — — — — X . — — — — J
0.8 PNK 39 e- Ignition
Ci
PoicePkg!| w/o Police Pkg.
0.5 TAM/WHT
e- Brake
0
Brake 33 Warning
0.35 0.35 PNK 39 Warning
‘ Indicator
PNKI 939 System
0.5 TAN/WHT Lamp
Cell 41
BLK Output
33
Power
Distribution
r
I
DRL/
-1Radio
Indicator
Bulb Check A
Celt 10
Cutout Park Brake
u \ Switch Switch Signal
i 0.8 LT BLU
_____________________________________________________________
Park Brake
Cell 46 Headlamp
0.8 ORN 340 0.8 LT GRN/BLK 592 1134 ^w_, ' And Panel
0.35 PNK 39 |B > Dimmer
L_ _ 10 Switch
S213' 1 YEL
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 LT BLU 1134 10 H>1 C266
17 5, -££>J
>
Diode
203 r 0 - - —- - >r Instrument 1 LT GRN 11
1Cluster
DAYTIME 'r HI BEAM ,
1
Running
Lamp
0 I
Indicator
Beam
I
|
& S225
B Instrument
0.35 PNK 39 Cluster Analog I
Cell 81 I
0.8 YEL 634 L> mm t=
3 n=
0.8 LT GRN/BLK 592 22T
0.5 BLK/WHT 451 Ground
0.35 PNK 39 S215 0 - - Distribution
Cell 14
1 BLK/WHT 451
G6 G4 1 Convenience Ground
Daytime Center S298( Distribution FWC200
Running Cell 14 ^*
rT Lamps 1 BLK/WHT 451
(DRL) 1 BLK 150
Relay Ground S103
Distribution
n 3 BLK 150 Cell 14 1 BLK/WHT 451
G5 H4 H6 T 0.8 BLK/WHT 451
i Gas Only
1 TAN C102
- — -----* ---- H S102
12 1 PPL ■&> 1 BLK/WHT 451
359 I >C266 & G200 AG104 m G103
Body and Accessories__________________________________________________________________
Power ^ ....J Underhood , r ^ Headlamp
Distribution Fuse Block , I Circuit
And Panel
Cell 10 N8 iL LIGHTING Dimmer
J Fuse 8 Power 1 «1 Breaker
MB 1 50 A Distribution i Switch
Cell 10 i Switch f . 's s r
i *■
5 RED 42
C100
5 RED 42 CT
3 RED 42..
G
-----------------»---------------- «>--------------- 1 YEL 10

A6 S2G5
0
DRL J
1YEL 10
Module
E13 J, C266
1YEL 10
D
r_.
' 1 Headlamp
1 / * Dimmer
lo / Hi
I * Switch
Iv
%/ ’
A C
1 LT GRN 11
0.8 TAN 12
E12^ E11. .C266
1 PPL 359
DRL
Relay [?>
1 LT GRN 11
Instrument 1 1 LT GRN
Cluster 11 (S225
DRL
Relay
1 LT GRN 11
1 IAN 12
F C102
1 TAN 12
1 LT GRN 11
v v
S120 SI 21
8-24
C102 Cl 02_______
Lighting Systems
V w
1 TAN 12
1 LT GRN 11
1 LT GRN 11
1 TAN 12 0
S120 < S120.li-
1 TAN 12
S121 < — • — -—■—
S121
1TAN 12 1 TAN 12 1 TAN 12
__________________________________________________________
1 LT GRN 11 1 LT GRN 11 1 LT GRN 11 1 LT GRN 11
A AA C/ ______ B S c,. . . . . . . ^
Headlamp
High/Low
f ; t Headlamp
High/Low
T Headlamp
High/Low
Headlamp
High/Low
kLO ALO
1 Ahi
Beam, RH Beam, LH Beam, RH
0
Beam, LH
(D : ®
(Q ) C 3 >
I ! i
LO Y
JL
HI LO
X
Y Hi
B B
1 BLK 150 1 BLK 250

1 BLK 150 1 BLK 250
1 BLK 150 1 BLK 250
S123 Ground Ground Ground

i— — — Distribution S128* S1231 Distribution S128 < Distribution
Cell 14 Cell 14 Cell 14
\%
._ Ground
Distribution
Cell 14 2 BLK 150 2 BLK 250
2 BLK 150 2 BLK 250
M G113 t G112 .6113 G112

8-26
1Hot in RUN, Bulb Test And START | jhTot At All Timesj
f Power ^ "1 Stoplamp Underhood I °c |
" Distribution |
#_
Relay Fuse Block
| Cell 10 H 4 k TL (Pickup
I ,„ C 15 Only)
>f w ^f \f
D 7 '{ E7) ' 00' 'E 9 '
j r a
L ± l
— — t V..........
150
Ground
Distribution
Cell 14
T
150 i
I
150 5 BLK 150
C411 G105
I Hot At All Times!
Luxury -P
- w" V i z r - - - - ; i p
Only Distribution F6 PARKLPS F lIS S
I Cell 10 (-> Fuse 9 I B lo c k 0.8 WHT 0.8 0.8
0.8 WHT 9 WHT WHT
'
LHTum
I — * !" "
AJr A
Indicator
A
0.8 BRN
T T T Roof
Marker 0
1 LT
BLU 14
C266
V
0.8 ORN 240
I
A C210
r : 11Convenience
I
D1•Center
i
r x -«Headlamp And
1I
1
l,
1Panel Dimmer
* Switch
—v j (Park Lamp Switch)
C271 b
©
Bk
®
N
0
B 'B
®
I
Lamps
s
i- 4- J 0.8 BLK 150 0.8 0.8
1 LT BLU 14
0.8 ORN 240
BLK 150 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 150
S267# EJ 0 \ 0.8 BLK 150
C409
r Headlamp
1 LT 1 1Control 0.8 BLK 150
BLU 14 I • Module A 0.8 BRN 9
Luxury/
Sport Fkg j Ground
- J Cell 101 8316 < Distribution
€ ^P100 rPIQO Cell 14
A 0.8 BRN 9 i i 0.8 BLK 150
1 LT 1 BRN 9
BLU 14 1 C C102 ir
\ if w/Quad
I Marker w/Quad
1 BRN 9 Fog Lamps Headlamps
Marker
' Lamp, LF Headlamps 2 J Lamp, RF
Only 0.8 BRN 9 Cell 103 Only
D, ,0102 C271
v A
1 DK BLU 15
3127
1 DK BLU 15
15: E C102 0.8 BLK 150
^ P100
Park/Turn
Park/Turn Lamp, RF Ground
Distribution >S204
Lamp, RF Cell 14
1 DKBLU 15 3 BLK 150
G G
1 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 0.8 BLK 250
0.8 BLK 150 S123 S128 S214 #
................ .......•. V......... .
Ground Ground 1 DK BLU 15 1 DKBLU 15
-4 Distribution Distribution
2 BLK 1150
l G113
Cell 14 Cell 14 2 BLK ;250
-G112 V
RHTum
A M
C266 M G200
Indicator
491562
8-28 Lighting Systems ___________________________________________________________________
S267 S214
V V
1 LT BLU 14 1 DKBLU
0
32
■* Instrument
0
LHTum RHTurn
Indicator Indicator 1Cluster
i
0 « - 0 + ■A
v Instrument v Instrument | JIMS?'
<------------ 4 Cluster. . ,— 4 Cluster
Cell 81 Cell 81 1
0.5 BLK/WHT
S215
I
1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451
Ground
S103 Distribution <8102
Cell 14
7
1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451
±G103 G104 lG104

8-30
C298
I Hot At All Timesj
,- .- - , |p
I" Power *4—— -4
Distributio n H2 r aux jF u s e
J Cell 10
ji
J Fuse 22 1Block
20 A
WWW
I
,
J s
0
1 BLK 940
C272
Police
Pkg
Only
1 BLK 940
S283
1 BLK 940 1 BLK 940
A, A
Ground
Distribution
Cell 14
Spotlamp, T
(Assembly)
LH
I
491585
Hot At All Times!
i |p Cargo oc
Power < — — -4
Distribution F8 CTSY [ Fuse Lamp
Cell 10 P Fuse
~ 3 Block
20 A
G7 ' Cargo
0) LP
_ jr
0.8 WHT 156
0
CHMSL
0.8 ORN 40
0,8 WHT 156
► S322
0) LP 0
0.8 WHT 156
Ground
0.8 DK BLU/WHT 149 Distribution
<$.......... t X----- JXJX
S242 Interior 1F
Lights 0.8 BLK 150 w/Reading CHMSL
Cell 114
Lamp Only © LP
_ r
Power
S323 <>-------------
Distribution
Cell 10 0.8 ORN 40 0.8 BLK 150
Cargo
0.8 WHT 17 LP
e A C411
J
0.8 WHT 156
D C411
0.8 BLK 150
0.8 DK BLU/WHT 149
Interior 0.8 WHT 17
Lights
1=0Cargo
1Lamp
Cell 114
A\
C298
1 1Switch H C298
L. Except Base Model
d ' Base Model C
T-
0.8 DK BLU/WHT 149
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 BLK 150
Ground
S251 Distribution >S259
Cell 14
2 BLK, 150 Y
I
S259 i■ i -------- _ J 5 BLK 150
5 BLK 150
J LG202 l0 2 02
8-32
S412 S421 S422
V V V ' Underhood
Lighting Systems______________________________________________________________________
Backup
Lights JFuse Block
Call 112 O
I
s
‘5 RED
Auxiliary
Lead
(Taped to
body near
Underhood
Fuse Block)
0.8 LT GRN 24
w/UY7 I
3 DK BLU 47
5 WHT 22 0.8 BRN 2 YEL 18 2 DKGRN 19
lG403
Trail er Tail LH Turn/ RH Turn/ Backup Battery Auxiliary

Ground And Hazard/ Hazard/ Lamps Power Lead
License Stoplamp Stoplamp
Lamps
I Hot In RUN AndSfA Rfl
4-----T . ^
I Power H4 1 TURN BAJ 1 IT
Distribution
ition J Fuse 16
1 Cell 10 J3 V 20 A 1 Block
0.8 PNK 139-

C7 a oo
0.8 PNK 139 0.8 PNK 139
[Autom^c"! j^jjanuaTI
A2 kG266
0.8 PNK 139 0.8 PNK 139
C Cl B 0.8 PNK 139
r T “* Transmission Backup
1 / 1Range (TR) Switch Lamp
1/ * J |part of park/neutral /
Switch
L -A jiposition switch) Exterio r
Lights
; f T ci A Celt 110
3.8 LT GRNJ^24 0.8 LT GRN 24
0.8 LT GRN 24
S160 <
0.8 LT GRN 24
A; ,C103 0.8 LT GRN 24
0.8 LT GRN 24 D3, .C100
C C409 0.8 LT GRN 24
0.8 LT GRN 24 B, C271
0.8 LT GRN 1 / m l t GRN 0.8 LT GRN 24
(Chassis Cab) A
(Except Chassis Cab) C
24 S414 24 (Chassis Cab) A
(Except Chassis Cab) C 1 0.8 LT GRN 24
Automatic Day/1
Night Mirror I
0 Backup Backup Cell 148 I
Lamp, © Lamp,
RH
(Chassis Cab) E LH (Chassis Cab) E
(Except Chassis Cab) A
(Except Chassis Cab) A
(Fleetside/Subuifcan Utility) 0.8 (Fleetside/Suburban Utility) 0.8
(Except Suburban Utility) 2 BLK 150 (Except Suburban Utility) 2 BLK 160 Trailer
Tow Cell 110
S411
----- fe------------------------- Ground
Distribution
(Except Suburban Utility) 3 BLK 150 CM 14.......
(Suburban Utility) 0.8 BLK
G401
8-34
j Hot At Ail Times j
Front
>ower < — — -¥ "* IP Dome
Wstribution F8 ®) CTSY | py§@
0.3 ORN 40 And
161110 <37S 20A3 'BlOCk Reading Iue
- — J
0.8 ORN 40 Lamps
0.8 ORN
s
Power 0.8 ORN 0298 0.8 ORN ^
Distribution ----- -— —— »— — — ■------c>
Ceil 10 fS242 40 A 40
0.8 ORN 40
0.8 WHT
B.
T0
ip
Compartment
Box Lamp
0.5 GRY 157
,r "JDoor
0.8 WHT 156 .Lock
0.8 GRY 157 , Control
j Module
B B
'f' DomeLamp"1Headlamp
/ 1 Defeat l And Panel 0.8 PPL 328

0.8
Court** | (Shownin i Dimmer Switch ORN/ 1897
1 Tclosed | 0.8 PPL 0302 BLK
t On J, position) ^ —
Y y 0.5 PPL 328
R ' L 0.5 «r
328PPL C298 328
S262 Cargo Door
0.5 PPL 328 S208
0.5 PPL 328
0.5 PPL 328 7 Jamb Switch
(Suburban/
I Utility Only)
0.5 PPL 328 B
A 0.8 BLK 150
"• A wA A
r _ _ _ - t p 0Q r r p oor j am b F f Door Door ^ _
1 BLK 1 } __ _ _- } 1Switch, LF 1 k _____} •’ Switch, RF / Jamb Jamb S410
Switch, LR I
*/ * / m 1 (Closed with 1/ « / * 1: (Closec ivlCh Switch, RR
I ' " L ,— — IlH J 1 door open) . - I I ——«— 1ZJ I door open) ----,J
mv\
A
(Closed with k A 1 (Closed with
door open) Ground
" d°°ropen) 5 BLK 150 Distribution
BT150
0.5 BLK
Cell 14
i G400
r p-----------------1-------------
0w@r *itip
ip
1 Distribution H8 K GAUGES >F
1 t
FUS©
I Cell 10 ( 1Block
| > to A |
0.8 PNK 39
Headlamp And
Panel Dimmer Power 0
Switch S213^ \-------- Distribution
Cell 10
V 0,35 PNK 39 0
0.5 GRY 157
. J C298 K, ,C299 A
w/ Remote w/ Remote wI Remote w/ Remote
Keyless Keyless Keyless 0.5 PNK 39 Keyless
Entry - Entry Entry Entry
S246 S298
V V
0.5 GRY 157 0.5 GRY 157 0.8 ORN 40 0.8 BLK 150 0.5 PNK 39
0.8 WHT 156 0.5 PNK 39
K B. E A
r 11Remote interior Interior
Door Ground
w/ Remote
1Control Jamb Lamp Battery Ignition Lamp
1Door Lock Switch / Output Switch Control
Keyless
Entry
J Receiver Input
l Module
A S251 7
0.8 BLK 150.
2 BLK 150 N_
r —' —1 1 Remote
Ground i 1Control
Distribution S259 i
Cell 14 1Door Lock
J Receiver
5 BLK 150
G202
491645
Interior Lights Schematics (Cell 114: Rear Dome and Reading Lamps, Door Courtesy Lamps
8-36
(Suburban/Utility/Crew Cab w/ Auxiliary Lighting))
8-38 Lighting Systems_____________________________________________________________________
Bo dy and Accessories__________________________________________________________________
ZZ
I Power " ~ ~ 1,p Fuse 0.8 BRN C302
—» _ 0.8 BRN C307
I Distribution PARK IPS Block
Fuse 9 9 9
G5 > . 20 A i
0
I
0.8 ORN 240 C298 0.8 BRN S247 0.8 BRN C496
H^ B 9 A 9 A ■' Garage
Park " 1 Headlamp •Door
Lamp
I Switch
1And Panel
*Dimmer
P800; , I® . Opener
*- 4- j 0
; “ J Switch 0.8
s BLK 150 Ground
0.8 BRN 9 0J BRN B ;C307 Distribution
Cell 14
Exterior S210 0.8
Lamps T
BLK 150
0.8 BRN 0.8 BRN 0.8 BRN
P700 S410
A . . ...- ..... ' " " Power
IF Ashtray r J ^ Power j; X 'Window • X ■ rower 1 % ' rower r ^ 1 power
Lamp 0 Outside | @ 0 |Switch, I / t \ I Window 1 (?) 1Window 1 (J) Window 1 ( T\ 1Window
® 1 w ■ Rearview I I r lie 1 V I Lockout * Ssr I Switch, 1 T iSwitch, I V i Switch,
L ^ J Mirror JLF l, ± j fiwitr.h t. i -i i l 1 j RR
i A Switch F c C1 A
2 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 BLK 150 2 BLK 150 0.5 BLK 150
ir P500 S500
r - - - H 1S218
i e, , C207 ^ P500
« 2 BLK 150 2 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 150
Ground F C209 5 BLK 150
Distribution
Cell 14 2 BLK 150
, y S251 2 BLK
I
4^= 150
L _ _ H
>S204
1
BLK 150 3 BLK 150
*G 200 MG202
IP ’ IP Ground
Ground A G400
8-40
(Hot AtAIITimesI
"’ Underhood
Power
Distribution 4 Fuse Block
Cell 10 H11 L HORN
Fuse
20 A
J12 ’
0.8 ORN 740 0

Power
Distribution >S113
Cell 10
0.8 ORN 740
0.8 ORN 740
'Underhood
Lamp
Braided
Ground — ►
Strap
491675
Bo dy and Accessories__________________________________________________________________
fHomWrimesI
Power *4
* Distribution pg N PK LPS JFUS6
I Cell 10 > Fuse 9 " B lo c k
0
0.8 GRY
S217
8
0.8 DKGRN 44
'-'IP f 1 Headlamp Hot With HEADLAMP A
SWITCH In PARK Or HEAD
1 1And Panel
Dimmer Switch M l
'‘E3 ILLUM •Fuse
FuseM l B |0 c k
I 04 | 10A I
0.35 GRY
S217
r “l Daylime
1 8Running Lamps
* 1(DRL)/Radio
0.8 PPL/WHT 1382 k _ j override Switch
256
Only
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382

S216
0.8 PPL/WHT 1382 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382

0,8 PPL/WHT 1382
B k 02 '
8 ..C1
r "* Transfer r "’ Inflatable r "* Instrument r ~ "' Radio
1 1Case 1 1Restraint 1 1Cluster 1 'Ceil 150
1 1Switch 1 I IP Module • 'Cell 81 1. — J1/TAa
V — J Transfer - J Switch L
U- J *
Case Sir Controls
Controls (Pickup/Extended
Cab Only)
W
S204 AA
8-42
0.35 GRY DRL
8 f> Switch
0.35 GRY Automatic
Transfer
8 Case
Headlamp And 0.8 GRY 0.35 GRY
Panel Dimmer
Switch
IP Fuse Block
[£>
[? >
8 '
0.35 GRY
8
8
0.35 GRY
8
0.35 GRY
Transfer
{ £ >►;Case
Switch
Audio
a
* Alarm 0
8 £ > ;Module
0.35 GRY AUX
>Heater
8 Switch
0.35 GRY HVAC
- | g > Control
I Convenience 8 Lamp
I Center C298
0.35 GRY-ItN,
hV
wiper
F11 "g " Switch
Suburban/
I
mi Utility Only 0.35 GRY
Radio
8 t>
h J bsio S253 0.35 GRY Liftgate
Release
£> Switch
h T c 300 is. <
-4 k > Lamp
^ Switch
S304
0.35GRY
1 r ------ - t
0.5 GRY L—< | « 0 > ^ | > - 0.35 BLK
0.5 GRY 1 Instrument A l ™ . . j E 150
t> S218
A A ........................................... 'Cluster Fog Lamp

r 1
i
"JAuxiliary "! Auxiliary ® ® ® ® ® ®! a Switch
0.5 i (t) HVAC
j W JControl IJ (?) HVAC
Y JControl , Control
i x— x — | — x— x — y l AnA
GRY 8
t. ± j Lamp l. ± jL a m p i j Illumination 31~
H (Front) “B v (Rear) A Lamp 1 BLK/WHT 451
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 BLK 150 0.5 BLK 150 S215«
S307 $259 < -j 1 BLK/WHT 451 I
.
— I
i F C200
I
Ground Ground
A
0.8 BLK 150 ^ X. - 4 Distribution Distribution 1 BLK/WHT 451 A
r — i B ^C300 Cell 14 Cell 14 € &P101 Ground
1 BLK/WHT 451 ^ - Distribution
1 I
0.8 BLK 150
T T Cell 14
( I I 5 BLK 150 i S103 t
t —j S410 ' X*
T
Auxil iary HVAC 5BLK 150 / 1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451 i
Control Switch,
Rear A G400 4^202 G103 MG104
Body and Accessorial
S217
V V w y V V
0.35 GRY 0.35 GRY 8
0.35 GRY
0.35 GRY 0.35 GRY 8
0.35 JL
GRY 0.35 GRY
ji
r ^ "’ Audio 0
• (T) 'Alarm
' T 'Module A
ia A
_______________________________________________________________
*- * J Cell 76
0.35 GRY
A stA 0.35 GRY 8 0.35 GRY 8 0.35 GRY A
0.8 BLK 150
7JC1 -a *^03 dI h! a!
^ "■ Liftgate r % "■ Radioi r 1 ">Rear r * HVAC r f ^ Auxiliary ’ ^ Transfer’r "* Inflatable r "l A uto- r ^ "1Daytime
— i - - . * — I '/T\ I A 1 /T \ 1Window 1 /¥ \ * Control 1 1Heater (T\ • Case 1
' fT)
(T) 1 Restraint * yT) 1matic 1 (T) * Running
'Re
' A 1 \*r
^ 1 Wiper/ 1 y I Lamp
«Wiper/ * y 1Control v 1Switch I' TV HP ‘ IP 1 T •Transfer! 1Lamps
L 3L «l * i.u i* jJ Washer
Washer «. i.j k j Swjtch .± j t*■ *± jmSModule
MaHi iIa l ^ J Case *" ^ J /nRi i/
Pickup f Suburban (DRL)/
Only B Utility Only H Switnh C Cl B f— —
Suburban Switch Select Radio
Utility Only SIR Switch Override
Controls Switch
Headlamp
And Panel [ V
Dimmer
Switch
1 BLK
Component Locator
Lighting Systems Components
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
In the ash tray housing Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Ash Tray Lamp Component Views Connector End Views
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Audio Alarm Module In the convenience center Component Views Connector End Views
On the top inside center of the windshield, Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Automatic Day-Night Component Views in Connector End Views in
Mirror with Compass part of the inside rearview mirror
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Heater Blower Controls Heater Blower Controls
Auxiliary Heater At the rear of overhead console molding, Component Views in Connector End Views in
Control Switch in the headliner, part of HVAC controls Heater and Ventilation Heater and Ventilation
(Non-A/C) (Non-A/C)
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control On the front of the overhead console, part in HVAC Systems w/ A/C Views in HVAC Systems
Lamp, Front of the HVAC controls
Manual w/ A/C Manual
At the rear of the overhead console HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control molding, in the headliner, part of the in HVAC Systems w/ A/C Views in HVAC Systems
Lamp, Rear HVAC controls Manual w/ A/C Manual
Backup Lamp, Left Side At the rear of the vehicle Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Cab Chassis) Component Views Connector End Views
Backup Lamp, Left Side At the rear of the vehicle Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Pickup/Utility) Component Views Connector End Views
Backup Lamp, Right At the rear of the vehicle Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Side (Cab Chassis) Component Views Connector End Views
Backup Lamp, Right At the rear of the vehicle Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Side (Pickup/Utility) Component Views Connector End Views
Backup Lamp On the left side of the transmission, below Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Switch (MGS) the shift tower Component Views Connector End Views
Backup Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
On the left top of the transmission Component Views Connector End Views
Switch (MW3)
At the rear center of the cab, above the
Cargo Lamp (Pickup) rear window, part of the center high Component Views Connector End Views
mounted stop lamp
Cargo Lamp Switch In the center of the IP, to the left of Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Pickup) the radio Component Views Connector End Views
Center High Mount Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Center High Mount Stoplamp (Pickup) Connector End Views
Stoplamp (Pickup) Component Views
Center High Mount Center High Mount Stoplamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Stoplamp (Suburban/Utility) Component Views Connector End Views
(Suburban/Utility)
Clearance Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
In the front of the left rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Left Front
In the rear of the left rear fender Connector End Views
Left Rear Component Views
In the front of the right rear fender Connector End Views
Right Front Component Views
In the rear of the right rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Right Rear
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Under the left side of the IP, on the Component Views in Connector End Views in
Convenience Center bulkhead Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
Located under the left side of the IP near Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, IP LH the knee bolster Component Views Connector End Views
Lighting Systems Components (cont’d)
Located under the right side of the IP near Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, IP RH the knee bolster Component Views Connector End Views
Courtesy Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Door LF Located within the left front door assembly Component Views Connector End Views
Courtesy Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Door LR Located within the left rear door assembly Component Views Connector End Views
Courtesy Lamp, Located within the right front door Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Door RF assembly Component Views Connector End Views
Courtesy Lamp, Located within the right rear door Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Door RR assembly Component Views Connector End Views
Daytime Running Under the left side of the IP, taped to the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamps (DRL) Module IP harness Component Views Connector End Views
Daytime Running Under the left side of the IP, at the lower Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamps (DRL) Relay center of the convenience center Component Views Connector End Views
Daytime Running In the center of the IP, to the left side of Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamps (DRL)/Radio Component Views Connector End Views
Override Switch (Z56) the radio
Approximately 22 cm (8.7 in) from the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Dome Lamp, Front
windshield centerline, in the headliner Component Views Connector End Views
Approximately 22 cm (8.7 in) from the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Dome Lamp, Rear
windshield centerline, in the headliner Component Views Connector End Views
Door Jamb At the rear body opening, part of the right Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Switch, Cargo rear cargo door contactor Component Views Connector End Views
Door Jamb Switch, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
At the left end of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Let Front
Door Jamb Switch, At the center inside edge of the left side Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Left Rear B Pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Door Jamb Switch, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Right Front At the right end of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Door Jamb Switch, At the center inside edge of the right side Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Right Rear B pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Control
Middle up the Left "C" Pillar Component Views in Connector End Views in
Module Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Endgate Indentification
Lamps Beneath Tailgate Component Views Connector End Views
(Dually, Fleetside)
Under the left end of the IP, on the lower Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp Relay Connector End Views
left side of the convenience center Component Views
On the center of the IP, to the right of the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp Switch
steering column shift lever Component Views Connector End Views
At the left lower edge of the front bumper Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp, Left Side Component Views Connector End Views
and the air deflector
At the right lower edge of the front bumper Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp, Right Side
and the air deflector Component Views Connector End Views
Garage Door Opener Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener Located within the Overhead Console Component Views in Connector End Views in
Garage Door Opener Garage Door Opener
Headlamp and Panel Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lower Left side of the IP Connector End Views
Dimmer Switch Component Views
Headlamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Part of the malfunction lever Connector End Views
Dimmer Switch Component Views
Headlamp, High Beam Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
On the left front of the vehicle Connector End Views
(Composite), Left Side Component Views
Headlamp, High Beam On the right front of the vehicle L ig h tin g S y s te m s L ig h tin g S y s te m s
(Composite), Right Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Headlamp, High/Low On the left front of the vehicle
L ig h tin g S y s te m s L ig h tin g S y s te m s
Beam, Left Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Headlamp, High/Low L ig h tin g S y s te m s L ig h tin g S y s te m s
On the right front of the vehicle
Beam, Right Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Headlamp, Low Beam On the left front of the vehicle
(Composite), Left Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Headlamp, Low Beam On the right front of the vehicle L ig h tin g S y s te m s L ig h tin g S y s te m s
(Composite), Right Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
P o w e r S e a t S y s te m s P o w e r S e a t S y s te m s
Heated Seat Switch, LF At the LF of the LF power seat C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
in Seats in Seats
P o w e r S e a t S y s te m s P o w e r S e a t S y s te m s
Heated Seat Switch, RF At the RF of the RF power seat C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
in Seats in Seats
H V A C C o m p o n e n t V ie w s H V A C C o n n e c to r E n d
HVAC Control Switch Center of IP below the Radio in HVAC Systems w/ A/C V ie w s in HVAC Systems
Manual w/A/C Manual
S ta n d a r d W h e e l/C o lu m n S ta n d a r d W h e e l/C o lu m n
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s in
Ignition Switch IP Steering Column, under Lock Cylinder
Steering Wheel and Steering Wheel and
Column Column
S IR C o n n e c to r E n d
V ie w s (S w itc h a n d
Inflatable Restraint IP RH of IP Cluster S IR C o m p o n e n t V ie w s S e n s o r V ie w s ) or S IR
Module Switch (Pickup) in SIR C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
( S D M C o n n e c to r V ie w )
in SIR.
interior Lamp Under the center of the IP L ig h tin g S y s te m s L ig h tin g S y s te m s
Control Module C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
In s tr u m e n t C lu s te r In s tr u m e n t C lu s te r
IP Cluster Above the Steering Column
Instrument Panel, Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console Gauges and Console
IP Compartment In the IP compartment box
Box Lamp C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
To the left of the IP, near the left front
IP Fuse Block C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
door jamb switch in Wiring Systems in Wiring Systems
License Lamps, At the rear of the vehicle
Left and Right Side C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
P o w e r D o o r S y s te m s P o w e r D o o r S y s te m s
In the center of the IP, to the left of
Liftgate Rel ease Switch C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
the radio in Doors in Doors
Marker Lamps, Roof Across the top front of the roof C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Marker Lamp, LF Left front fender assembly C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Marker Lamp, RF Right front fender assembly C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Park/Turn Lamp, LF At the LF corner of the vehicle C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Park /Turn Lamp, RF At the LF corner of the vehicle
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Name Location Locator View 0 ‘ inector End View
Mounted on Park Brake, under LH Park Brake System Park Brake System
Park Brake
. Component Views Connector End Views
Warning Switch end of IP
in Parking Brakes in Parking Brakes
Drivers Door Panel, below the inside door Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Power Outside
Component Views Connector End Views
Rearview Mirror Switch handle in Doors
in Doors
Power Window Switch, On the left front door trim panel, below the
Left Front inside door handle in Doors
in Doors
On the left front door trim panel, below the Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Power Window Switch,
Left Rear inside door handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Window Switch, On the right front door trim panel, below Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Right Front the inside door handle in Doors
in Doors
Power Window Switch, On the right rear door, below the inside Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Right Rear door handle
in Doors in Doors
Entertainment Entertainment Connector
Radio In the center of the IP Component Views End Views in
in Entertainment Entertainment
Reading Lamps, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Near the windshield centerline Connector End Views
Overhead Console Component Views
Remote Control Door Right side of the Steering Column support
Component Views In Connector End Views In
Lock Reciever bracket underneath the IP Power Door Systems
Power Door Systems
Spotlamp, LH (Z56) Located on the outside of the left "A" Pillar Connector End Views
Component Views
Located on the outside of the right Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Spotlamp, RH (Z56)
"A" Pillar Component Views Connector End Views
In the underhood fuse block, left rear side Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Stoplamp Relay of the engine compartment, on the fender Connector End Views
Component Views
Stoplamp Switch Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
On the top of the brake pedal Component Views Connector End Views
Sunshade Mirror Part of the left side sunvisor Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamp, Left Side Component Views Connector End Views
Sunshade Mirror Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamp, Right Side Part of the right side sunvisor Connector End Views
Component Views
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems
On the left rear corner of the vehicle Lighting Systems
(Cab Chassis), Connector End Views
Left Rear
Component Views
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp
(Pickup/Utility), On the right rear corner of the vehicle Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Left Rear
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Cab Chassis), On the right rear corner of the vehicle Connector End Views
Right Rear Component Views
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems
(Pickup/Utility), On the left rear corner of the vehicle Connector End Views
Right Rear Component Views
Transfer Case Mode Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Selector In Transfer Case Select Switch Component Views in Connector End Views in
Illumination Lamp Transfer Case Transfer Case
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Transfer Case Top LH of Transfer Case
Switch (M30) Component Views in Connector End Views in
Transfer Case Transfer Case
Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Top LH of Transfer Case Component Views in Connector End Views in
Switch (MGS)
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Transfer Case Top LH of Transfer Case
Switch (MT1)
Component Views in Connector End Views in
Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Top LH of Transfer Case Component Views in Connector End Views in
Switch (MW3)
Automatic Transmission
Electronic Component AT Inline Harness
Views (lntemal)(4LQ0E), Connector End
Transmission Range Automatic Transmission View(4LQ0E), AT Inline
On the left side of the Transmission
Switch Electronic Component Harness Connector End
Views (Internal) View (4L60E) in
(4L60E) in Transmission/Transaxle
Transmission/Transaxle
Mounted to the convenience center, under
Turn/Hazard Flasher the left side of the IP, to the left side of the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
steering column, on the bulkhead Component Views Connector End Views
Part of the multifunction switch, on the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Turn/Hazard Switch
upper left side of the steering column Component Views Connector End Views
In the left rear side of the engine
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Underhood Fuse Block Component Views in Connector End Views in
compartment, on the fender
Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
Lighting Systems
Underhood Lamp Under the right side of the hood Lighting Systems
Connector End Views
Component Views in Lighting Systems
On the left front door, below the inside Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Window Lockout
door handle, part of the power window Component Views Connector End Views
Switch, Rear
master switch in Doors in Doors
Window Wiper/Washer Wiper/Washer System Wiper/Washer System
Switch, Rear Center of the IP, right of the radio Component Views in Connector End Views in
Wiper Washer Systems Wiper Washer Systems
Part of the engine harness to IP harness, Inline Harness Connector
in the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views
C100
in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
compartment, at the bulkhead Systems
Part of the forward lamps harness to IP
harness, in the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C102
compartment, near the underhood in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
fuse-relay center, mounted on the fender Systems
Part of the engine harness to fuel pump
motor, in the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C103
compartment, under the brake master in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
cylinder Systems
Part of the IP harness to front to rear
harness, in the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C104
compartment, under the brake master in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
cylinder Systems
Behind the right side of the IP, near the Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C200
heater motor, in foam wrap in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C206 inside the lower left side A pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems Systems
Harness Routing Views End Views in Wiring
C207 Inside the lower left side A pillar
Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C209 Inside the lower left side A pillar in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems
C210 At the convenience center End Views in Wiring
Harness Routing Views
C215 Inside the lower right side A pillar End Views in Wiring
C227 Harness Routing Views End Views in Wiring
IP harness, Inline to the Stoplamp Switch in Wiring Systems
(Stoplamp Switch) Systems
C242 Part of the IP Harness, at the left side of Harness Routing Views End Views in Wiring
(Z56) the steering column, near the bulkhead in Wiring Systems
Systems
Part of the IP harness to steering column Inline Harness Connector
C266 harness, to the left side of the steering in Wiring Systems
column, near the bulkhead Systems
IP harness to Roof Lamp & Mirror harness in Wiring Systems
Systems
0272 Harness Routing Views End Views in Wiring
Inline to spotlamps in Wiring Systems
(Z56 Police Package) Systems
Behind the left side of the IP, near the Harness Routing Views End Views in Wiring
C298 convenience center in Wiring Systems
Systems
Behind RH of IP, above HVAC evaporator, Harness Routing Views
0299 End Views in Wiring
housing in Wiring Systems Systems
C300 In the overhead console in Wiring Systems Systems
C301 At the left front kick panel in Wiring Systems Systems
C302 At the LF kick panel in Wiring Systems
Systems
Front to Rear Harness, Inline to the Harness Routing Views
C307 End Views in Wiring
Overhead Console Harness in Wiring Systems
Systems
Below the left rear edge of the bed in Wiring Systems
(Pickup) Systems
Lower center outside of the endgate
(Suburban/Utility) in Wiring Systems
Systems

C408 Below the center rear edge of the bed End Views in Wiring
(Pickup/Cab) in Wiring Systems
Systems
Below the rear center of the bed, near the Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C409 bumper in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems
C411 Crossbody harness, Inline to Rear Cargo Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
(Pickup) Lamp harness in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems

C496 In the right side B pillar in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems

C498 In the left side B pillar in Wiring Systems End Views in Wiring
Systems
Power and Grounding
Part of the IP harness, at the right side of Component Views in
D203 the steering column support —
Wiring Systems
On the right front side of the engine, near Power and Grounding
G103 Component Views in
(Gas) the thermostat housing —
Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G104
Backside of the right cylinder head Component Views in —
(5.0L/5.7L)
Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G104
Top rear of the right cylinder head Component Views in —
(6.5L) Wiring Systems
G104 Backside of the engine block, below the Power and Grounding
Component Views in ... . . — ...
(7.4L) right cylinder head
Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G105 Component Views in
(Gas) On the right front side of the engine block —
Wiring Systems
Right Rear of the cylinder head, Power and Grounding

G105
cylinder #7 intake bolt Component Views in —
(Diesel)
Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
Located in the Engine Compartment on Component Views
G108 the top side of the Bulkhead —
in Wiring Systems
Engine Compartment, Behind the right Power and Grounding

G112 side battery Component Views —
in Wiring Systems
On the radiator support, near the left side Power and Grounding
G113 headlamp Component Views —
in Wiring Systems
Behind the left side of the IP, below the Power and Grounding
G200 Component Views —
fuse block, on the tie bar
in Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G202 On the right side of the instrument panel, Component Views
mounted to the HVAC plenum bracket —
in Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G400 On the right side B pillar, near the door Component Views
(Utility/Suburban) striker —
in Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G401 Left side rear frame rail behind the bumper Component Views —
in Wiring Systems
Name Location sator View inector End View
Power and Grounding
G403 Left side rear frame rail behind the bumper Component Views —
in Wiring Systems
In the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views
P100 compartment, at the bulkhead, in Wiring Systems —
above C100
In the right side of the engine Harness Routing Views
P101 —
compartment, at the bulkhead in Wiring Systems
Passthrough between the left "A" Pillar Harness Routing Views
P500
and the left front door in Wiring Systems
Passthrough between the right "A" Pillar Harness Routing Views
P600 —
and the right front door in Wiring Systems
Passthrough between the left "B" Pillar Harness Routing Views
P700
and the left rear door in Wiring Systems
Engine harness approx. 6.5 cm (2.5 in)
S102
from trans connector breakout, towards the — '
(6.5L) Starter Solenoid harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S103
EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp — —
(5.0L, 5.7L)
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.7 in)
S103
from starter solenoid breakout, towards the —
(6.5L) Underhood Lamp harness breakout
S103 __
the EGR Valve harness breakout, towards —
(7.4L - ATT)
the Ignition Coil harness breakout
Engine Harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in)
1O
CO
P u >
from the Fuel Injector harness breakout, — —.

^4
3
2
towards the Taillamp harness breakout

S107
EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp ' — —
(5.0L, 5.7L) harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 40 cm (15 in)
S107 —
from EBCM breakout, toward Transmission — ■ ■
(6.5L, HD)
harness breakout
S107 EBCM breakout, toward tthe EGR harness —
(7.4L) breakout
S113 from EBCM breakout, into the Underhood - —
Fuse Relay Center harness
Forward lamps harness, approx. 16 cm
S119 (6 in) from Windshield Wiper harness —
breakout, towards the left fog lamp
S120 (8.5 in) from windshield washer pump ■_
breakout, toward LH headlamp
S121 (4.5 in) from LH headlamp breakout, — —
toward windshield washer pump
Forward lamps harness, approx. 35.5 cm
S122 (14 in) from Windshield Wiper harness — •—
breakout, towards the left fog lamp
- Name : . Location mtoi View Connector End View
S123 (9 in) from LH park lamp breakout, toward —
windshield washer pump
(2 right side lights harness breakout,
S127
towards the SIR Front Sensor harness
— —
breakout
S t 28 (2 in) from RH headlamp breakout, '. — —
toward G112
engine harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from
SI 47
(Gas)
EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp — ■■ —
harness breakout
S147 Engine harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
(Diesel) starter motor solenoid breakout —
S160 Engine harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in) from
(5.0L, 5.7L) EBCM breakout, toward taillamp harness — —
S160
from EBCM breakout, toward EGR valve ■ — . —
(6.5L) breakout
Engine harness, approx. 28 cm (11 in)
S160
from fuel injector breakout, toward taillamp — —
(7-4L) harness breakout
Engine compartment, IP harness, approx.
S165 9 cm (3.5 in) from P100, toward forward —-
lamps harness connector
S167 (All Except Z56, Engine harness, approx. 18 cm (7 in) _ . __
Police Package) from G115
S167 Battery harness, approx. 35 cm (13.5 in) —
(Z56 Police Package) from C121 ' —■
IP harness approx. 6.5 cm (2.5 in) from
S202 Convenience Center breakout toward DRL — —
module
IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from . _ .
S204
C100, towards Data Link Connector (DLC)
—.
IP harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in) from '_
S205
steering column harness breakout
- /—
IP harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from IP —
S208
compartment box lamp breakout —
IP harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in) from IP
S209
compartment box lamp breakout '. — ■ '—
S210 IP harness, approx. 14 cm (5.5 in) from
(Diesel) steering column harness breakout — —
S210 IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from —
(Gas) auxiliary power outlet breakout ■ -—
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S213 steering column harness breakout, towards
the DLC
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from the
S214 Instrument Cluster connector harness . —
breakout, towards the Instrument Cluster
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S215 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
connectors breakout
IP harness, approx, 12 cm (4.5 in) from
S216
instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
(Diesel and Uplevel)
connectors breakout
Lighting System s Com ponents (cont’d)
S216 (Gas, ail except instrument cluster breakout, toward'radio
upievel) —
connectors breakout
S217 instrument cluster harness breakout, — —
toward radio connectors breakout
S218 inflatable restraint switch breakout ■ —' . —

S220 steering column harness breakout, —
toward C100
S225 radio harness breakout —
S239 In fuel select switch jumper harness — —

S240 In fuel select switch jumper harness — —
S242 inflatable restraint switch breakout, — —
towards the Auxiliary Power Connectors
Crossbody harness, approx. 22 cm (8.5 in)
S246 from LF door harness breakout — —
S247 Crossbody harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in)

into LH door harness breakout — ■' —
Crossbody harness, approx. 35 cm (13 in)

S248 before the LF door harness breakout, '■' —
from C301 ■
S251 from LF Door harness breakout, toward IP ■'— —
harness breakout
S253 from C210 and C298 harness breakout, — —
toward IP harness right door harness’
Crossbody harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in) _L"
S259 into seat belt switch harness, toward C212 —

S262 —
(Crew Cab) from seat belt switch breakout, toward IP —
harness breakout
S262 from seat belt switch breakout, toward IP . ___
(Suburban/Utility)
harness breakout
S267 Instrument Cluster harness breakout, — —
toward Instrument Cluster connector
Spotlamp Extension harness, approx.
S283 35 cm (13.5 in) from C272 harness . ___
(Z56) —
breakout, towards the RH Spotlight
breakout
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) into the
S299 steering column harness breakout, — —
toward C266
Rear HVAC control harness, approx.
S304 (4-Door 31 cm (12 in) from auxiliary HVAC control
Utility/Suburban) — —
logic module breakout, toward front
auxiliary HVAC control module
Rear HVAC control harness, approx.
S307 (4-Door 10 cm (4 in) from auxiliary HVAC control
Utility/Suburban) logic module breakout, toward front — —-
auxiliary HVAC control module
Front-to-rear body harness approx. 5 cm
S310 (2 in) from auxiliary HVAC fan switch —
(4-Door Utility) —
breakout
Illuminated Vanity mirror jumper harness,
approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from inside rearview
S312 mirror breakout, toward LH Illuminated — —
vanity mirror
Illuminated vanity mirror jumper harness,
S316 approx. 8 cm (3 in) toward LH illuminated — —
vanity mirror
Dome/Reading CHMSL harness, approx.
S322 15 cm (5.5 in) from connector C411 — —
towards front dome lamp
Dome/Reading CHMSL harness, approx.
S323 6.5 cm (2.5 in) from CHMSL hamess — —
breakout towards front dome lamp
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 37 cm
S410 (14.5 in) from RR door jamb switch
(2-door Utility) breakout, toward RH door speaker — — .
breakout
S410 (4-Door
(4.5 in) from RR door speaker breakout, — —
Utility/Suburban)
toward RR door jamb breakout
Taillamp harness, approx. 33 cm (13 in)
S411 from taillamp extension harness breakout,
— —
(Chassis Cab) towards the RH Tail & Stoplamp
Connector
S411 Taillamp harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)

from taillamp extension harness breakout, — —
(Fleetside) toward LH taillamp
S411 (Suburban/Utility/ Taillamp hamess, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)

from tailamp trailer tow harness breakout, — —
Stepside)
toward RH taillamp
S412 Taillamp harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in)

(Chassis Cab)
toward RH taillamp
S412 from taillamp extension harness breakout,
(Fleetside/Stepside) — —
toward RH taillamp
S412 Taillamp harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in)
(Fleetside/Stepside from taillamp extension harness breakout, — —
w/Dual Rear Wheels) toward RH taillamp
Taillamp harness, approx. 27 cm (10.5 in)
S413 from trailer hamess breakout, toward RH
(Fleetside/Stepside) — —
taillamp
S414 Tailamp harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from

taillamp extension harness breakout, — —
(Chassis Cab) toward RH taillamp
S414
(Chassis Cab, HD) from taillamp extension harness breakout, — —
toward RH taillamp
S414
(Fleetside/Stepside) toward LH taillamp
License Plate Lamp harness, approx. 8 cm
S415 (3 in) from connector C407 harness — —
breakout, toward LH license plate lamp
License Plate Lamp harness, approx. 8 cm
S416 (3 in) from connector C407 harness — —
breakout, toward RH license plate lamp
S417 (13.5 in) from front dome lamp breakout, — —
(2-Door Utility)
toward C301 breakout
S417 (4-Door Utility/ Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 23 cm
— —
Suburban) (9 in) into convenience center
Front to Rear harness, located at the
S419
CHMSL inline resistor — —
Tail/Stop Lamp harness, approx. 6.5 cm
S421 (2.5 in) from ground G401 harness — —
breakout, towards RH taillamp
Tail/Stop Lamp harness, approx. 6.5 cm
S422 (2.5 in) from trailer harness breakout, —' —
towards RH taillamp '
Front to Rear harness, located at the
S424 — —
CHMSL inline resistor
Front to Rear harness, approx. 12 cm
(4.5 in) from C302 and C302 harness
S426
breakout, towards Auxiliary HVAC Module — — -
Switches
Left Front Door harness, after the Power —
S500
Window Master Switch —
Left Front Door harness, before the Power
S502
Window Master Switch — —
Lighting Systems Component Views
Headlamps, LH (RH Typical)
Legend
(1) Headlamp (Export) (4) Park/Turn Lamp
(2) Headlamp (Composite) (5) Headlamp, Low Beam
(3) Marker Lamp (6) Headlamp, High Beam
Fog Lamps
Legend
(1) Fog Lamp (Rear View) (3) Fog Lamp Connector
(2) Forward Lamp Harness
Underhood Lamp
Legend
(1) Underhood Lamp (4) Engine Hamess
(2) G108 (5) P101
(3) Underhood Lamp Connector
Connectors: C107, C120 (5-Speed Manual)
276778
(1) C120 (2) C107

DRL Module, Stoplamp Switch
278093
Legend
(1) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Module (4) Stoplamp Switch
(2) Ignition Switch (5) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Diode
(3) Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Solenoid
Convenience Center
Legend
(1) Convenience Center (4) DRL Relay
(2) Audio Alarm Module (5) Fog Lamp Relay
(3) Turn/Hazard Flasher (6) Park Brake Warning Switch
Interior Lamp Control Module
278106
Legend
(1) Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Module (3) Transfer Case Control Module
(2) Interior Lamp Control Module
Fog Lamp Switch
(1) Forward Lamp Harness (2) Fog Lamp Connector

Emergency Roof Lamp Switch (Z56)
278134
(1) Emergency Roof Lamp Switch

468790
Legend
(1) Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module (4) Turn Signal Lever
Connector (5) Emergency Flasher Switch
(2) Steering Column (6) steering Wheel
(3) Tilt Lever
Spotlamp (Police Package)
375593
Legend
(1) Spotlamp Connector, Right Side (5) C272
(2) Spotlamp Harness (6) Spotlamp Connector, Left Side
(3) Crossbody Harness (7) Spotlamp, Left
(4) Spotlamp Hamess
314703
(1) Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Left (Right Opposite)

Connectors: C300, C307 (Overhead Console)
375523
Legend
(1) Front-to-Rear Body Harness (6) Dome Lamp Hamess

(2) C307 (7) Garage Door Lamp Switch
(3) Dome Lamp Connector, Front (8) Auxiliary HVAC Control Module
(4) Auxiliary HVAC Control Module Harness Connector, Front
(5) Dome Lamp Connector, Front (9) Overhead Console Harness
278142
Legend
(1) Wiring Harness (4) Dome Lamp Lens
(2) Dome Lamp Connector (5) Windshield
(3) Dome Lamp (Z56)
Roof Marker Lamps
Legend
(1) Clearance Lamps Harness, Roof (4) Clearance Lamp Connector
(2) Clearance Lamps Harness, Roof (5) Clearance Lamp Hamess, Roof
(3) C271 (6) Clearance Lamp
Courtesy Lamp, All Doors
375560
Legend
(1) Courtesy Lamp, Door (3) Door Harness
(2) Courtesy Lamp Connector
Crosshody Harness Inline to RR Door (LR Typical)
Legend
(1) Crossbody Harness (3) C496 & C497 (RR)/C498 & C499 (LR)
(2) Door Jamb Switch, RR/LR (4) Crossbody Harness
Rear Dome Lamp
278139
(1) Rear Dome Lamp

278167
Legend
(1) Left and Right Front Clearance Lamp (5) Fuel Pump Balance Module
(2) Left and Right Rear Clearance Lamp (6) Fuel Pump (Dual Tanks-Diesel)
(3) Fuel Gauge Sender (w/Dual Tanks-Diesel) (7) Primary Fuel Tank
(Dual Tanks-Gasoline)
(4) Fuel Pump Ba lance Relay
Center High Mount Stoplamp and Cargo Lamp Door Jamb Switch, Liftgate Right Rear
(except Suburban/Utility)
Legend
(1) Bolt
(2) CHMSL Lens
(3) Base
(4) Socket
(5) CHMSL Connector
(6) Insulator
(7) CHMSL Mounts
Center High Mount Stoplamp Wiring

(Suburban/Utility)
278002
Legend
(1) Doorjamb Switch, Liftgate RR
277175
Legend
(1) CHMSL Lens
(2) Bolt
(3) CHMSL Mount
(4) CHMSL Connector
Cargo Door Wiring (Right Side)
Legend
0 ) Cargo Door Contactor and

Door Jamp Switch
(2) P900
(3) Cargo Door Lock Actuator
(4) Cargo Door Lock Actuator, Connector
(5) Rear Window Defogger Connectors
(6) P901
Tail/Stop Lamp, LH (RH-Typical)
468323
Legend
(1) Tail Lamp Assembly (Rear View) (4) Tail Lamp Assembly (Front View)
(2) Tail Lamp Connector (5) Backup Lamp
(3) Tail Lamp Harness (6) Tail Lamp Harness
375553
(1) C408 (2) Endgate Marker Lamps

Tail and Stoplamp Harness Connectors
7 1 2
375538
Legend
(1) Tail/Stop Lamp Extension Harness (5) License Plate Lamps
(2) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness (6) C409
(3) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, RH (7) C407
(4) License Plate Lamp Harness
405724
Legend
(1) G401 (4) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, LH
(2) Auxiliary Fuel Tank (Dual Tanks Only) (5) Tail/Stop Lamp Assembly, LH
(3) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness
278099
(1) License Lamps

Visual Identificatio n
Lighting Systems Connector End Views Cargo Lamp Switch
Ashtray Lamp
,..n fl n
(CH------Tl)
I
e h
Connector Part 12129135
Information 4F Metri-Pack 280
• 12124722 Series (BLK)
Connector Part
Information • 2 Way M Micro-Pack 150 Circuit
Series (GRY) Pin Wire Color No. Function
Circuit Instrument Panel
GRY
Pin Wire Color No. Function Lamp Feed
A BRN 9 Lamp Feed BLK 150 Ground
B BLK 150 Ground Fuse Output - Battery
ORN 40
Type III Fuse
Backup Lamp Switch DK BLU/
WHT 149 Courtesy Lamp Feed
(Manual Transmission)
Courtesy Lamp, LF, RF, RR, LR
t .....................j
l| | |n D
“ i j f i
38553
Connector Part • 12103583

62470
Information • 2M Weather Pack (BRN)
Circuit Connector Part • 12047663
Pin Wire Color No. Function Information • 2 Way Lamp Socket Type W
- Axial (BLK)
A LT GRN 24 Back-up Lamp Feed
Circuit
Fuse Output Ignition 1 Pin Wire Color No, Function
B PNK 139 Type III Fuse
ORN 40 Fuse Output - Battery
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Cargo Lamp And Center High Mounted Daytime Running Lamp Control Module
Stop Lamp (03, 43, 53)
-----------F=l--------
/ ( ^
CD
O
[| H G F E D
>
3
J H----ff->
/
\ ..... _ B /
283863

12047785 Information • 8 Way P/C Edgeboard (BLK)
Connector Part
Information 2 Way Lamp Socket Type W Circuit
- Axial (BLK) Pin Wire Color No, Function
Circuit Park Brake Switch
Pin Wire Color NO. Function A LT BLU 1134
Signal Input
BLK 156 Courtesy Lamp Output Park Brake Switch
B ‘ LT BLU 1134
WHT 150 Ground Signal Input
DK BLU/ Courtesy Lamp Feed Fuse Output - Ignition 1
149 C PNK 39
WHT - Type III Fuse
Stop Lamp Switch Aux-Fuse Output
D WHT 17 C PNK/BLK 939
Output Z56 (Only)
Headlamp Switch
D YEL 10/6
Center High Mounted Stoplamp (06,16) Output
E TAN/WHT 33 Park Lamp Feed
F TAN/WHT 33 DRL Lamp Feed
LT GRN/
G 592 DRL Relay Output
BLK
H BLK 150 Ground
•12047663
Connector Part
Information • Lamp Socket Wedge Base
W2 Right Angle (BLK)
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No* Function
Stop Lamp Switch
WHT 17
Output
BLK 150 Ground
Daytime Running Lamp Diode Module Door Jamb Switch, Cargo
•12064749 Connector Part 59251

Connector Part
Information • 2 Way F Metri-Pack 480 Information 2 Way F Metri-Pack
Series (BLK) 150 (RED)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No/ Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery - Dome Lamp Defeat
ORN 340 Type III Fuse A GRN/BLK 1897 Switch Output
(w/o Keyless Entry
YEL 634 Reduced Voltage Feed
B BLK 150 Ground
.Dome Lamps.
Door Jamb Switch, LF
f --"N
’ ' B A
n (1
A B C .
V J
68722
333035
Information • 2-Way Base { m i ) • 12047781
Connector Part
Circuit Information • 3 Way Dome Lamp
Base (BLK)
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Circuit
Fuse Output - Battery
A ORN 40 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Type II Fuse
Dome Lamp Defeat
B WHT 156 Courtesy Lmap Output
A PPL 328 Switch Output
(w/o Keyless Entry)
B BLK 150 Ground
Key Reminder Switch
C TAN 159
Output
Door Jamb Switch, Liftgate
i
Fog Lamp, LH
I".I I Z Z ]
c
—
fi Pi
H
A
B
V —-
i
m r
I
38554
Connector Part • 59251 Connector Part • 12015792

Information • 2 Way Dome Lamp information • 2F Weather Pack
Base (BLK) TWR (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
Interior Lamp Defeat A BLK 150 <
Ground
PPL 328 Switch Output
B PPL 34 Fog Lamp Feed
BLK 150 Ground
Fog Lamp, RH
DRL & Radio Over ride Z56.'(Only).
tl
i
jj
l
3 l
38554
• 12015792
• 12064752 Connector Part
Connector Part Information • 2F Weather Pack
Information • 6F Metri-Pack Series TWR (BLK)
280 (BLK)
Circuit
Circuit Pin Wire Color No. Function
A BLK 250 Ground
Instrument Panel
GRY B PPL 34 Fog Lamp Feed
Lamp Feed
BLK 150 Ground
PPL/WHT 1382 LED Dimming Switch
Fuse Output - Ignition 1
D PNK 39
Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Ignition 1
PNK/BLK 939
Type III Fuse
PPL/WHT 982 Radio Park Lamp Feed
Fog Lamp Switch Headlamp, RH
£
C H C S C E II
lA J L iJ C c ]
40422 306269
• 12084762 12034372
Connector Part Connector Part
Information • 6 Way F Metri-Pack 150 Information 3 Way F Metri-Pack 800
Series (GRY) Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Fog Lamp Relay BLK 250 Ground
A YEL 317
Feed - Coil
High Beam
LT GRN 11
B — — Not Used Headlamp Feed
C BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed Low Beam
TAN 12
Headlamp Feed
D PPL 34 Fog lamp Feed
E BLK 150 Ground
Headlamp, Left High Beam
Instrument Panel
F GRY 8
Lamp Feed
Headlamp, LH
10 0 [
Connector Part 12059183
Information 2 Way F Metri-Pack 280
306269
Series (BLK)
Circuit
• 12034372 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Connector Part
Information • 3 Way F Metri-Pack 800
High Beam
Series (BLK) LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed
Circuit BLK 150 Ground
A BLK 150 Ground
High Beam
B LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed
Low Beam
C TAN 12
Headlamp Feed
Headlamp Low Beam, LH Headlamp, Right High Beam
B
f i ^ i s
p _ 3
i\ll a j] ]] I A
35447 35447
Connector Part • 12059181 • 12059183

Connector Part
Information • 2F Metri-Pack 280 Information • 2 Way F Metri-Pack 280
Series (GRA) Series (BLK)
Circuit
o
11
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color Function
.p Low Beam High Beam
A TAN A LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed Headlamp Feed
B BLK 150 Ground B BLK 250 Ground
Headlamp Low Beam, RH

Headlamp Panel Dimmer Switch
(( B m l
A
A.
II
X B C D E
X G H ]L
X K L M N
X R s
!r
35444

• 2F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part • 12146952
Information
Series (GRA) Information • 12-Way F Metri-Pack 280
Series Flex Lock (BLK)
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Circuit
Low Beam Pin Wire Color No. Function
A TAN 12
Headlamp Feed Not Used
B BLK 250 Ground GRA 157 Interior Lamp Output
Fuse Output-Battery-
RED 42
Type II Fuse
Fuse Output-IGN 1-
PNK 39
Type III Fuse
Instrument Panel Lamps
DKGRN 44
Dimmer Switch Output
Not Used
Headlamp Switch
YEL 10
Output _ _____
Headlamp Panel Dimmer Switch (cont’d) Interior Lamp Control Module
E D C B A
T X IO — I .
® 12146952 12041429
Information ® 12-Way F Metri-Pack 280 Information 5 Way F Metri-Pack 280
Series Flex Lock (BLK) Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Fuse Output-Battery- Fuse Output-IGN 1-
H ORN 240 PNK 39
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
' "J — Not Used GRA 157 Interior Lamp Output
K — — Not Used Fuse Output-Battery-
ORN 40
Interior Lamp Defeat Type III Fuse
L PPL 328 Switch Guipui BLK 150 Ground
y WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
N PPL/WHT 1382 LED Dimming Signal
P — — Not Used License Lamps LH, RH
R BLK 150 Ground
S BRN : 9 Park Lamp Feed
Instrument Panel (IP) Compartment Lamp
Connector Part ® 12020348

information • Lamp Socket Type W-2
Circuit
• 12047662 BRN Lamp Feed
Connector Part
Information • 2 Way M Metri-Pack 150 BLK 150 Ground
Series (BLK)
Circuit
BLK 150 Ground
Fuse Output- Battery-
ORN 40 Type III Fuse______
UgHi'ting Systems 8-89
Marker Lamp, Left Park and Turn Signal Lamps, Left Front
< ------
—
m
<
287977 296872
• 12110053 ■ • 12089345
Information • Lamp Socket Type W-2 Information ® Lamp Socket C2 Base Right
Axial Bulb Bases (LT GRY) Angle (NAT)
Circuit Circuit
Fin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
14 Turn Signal Lamp Feed, A LT BLU 14 Turn Signal Lamp Feed
A LT BLU
Right Front
B' BRN 9 Lamp Feed
B BLK 9 Park Lamp Feed
C BLK 150 Ground
Marker Lamp, Right Park and Turn Signal Lamps, Right Front
B A }
287977
296872
® 12110053
Connector Part « 12089345
Information • Lamp Socket Type W-2 Connector Part
Axial Bulb Bases (LT GRY) Information • Lamp Socket C2 Base Right
Angle (NAT)
Circuit
Wire Color Circuit
Pin No. Function
Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
A DK BLU 15 A DK BLU 15 Turn Signal Lamp Feed
Right Front
B BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
B BRN 9 Lamp Feed
G BLK 250 Ground
Roof Marker Lamps Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Right
Connector Part 08294702 • 1204766

information Connector Part
2-Way Base (NAT) Information • 2 Way F Metri-Pack 150
Circuit Series (BLK)
Pin Wire Color No, Function Circuit
WHT Park Lamp Feed
BLK 150 Ground ORN 40
Type III Fuse
BLK 150 Ground
Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Left
Tail and Stop Lamp, Left
j j u .
U T T C -W T T \ )
\ > ---------------------------_ y y
Connector Part • 12047663 236398

■ Series (BLK) Connector Part • 12065861
Circuit Information • 5F Metri-Pack 280
Pin Wire Color No. Function Series (BLK)
Circuit
ORN 40 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Type III Fuse
A BLK 150 Ground
BLK 150 Ground
Stop/Turn Lamp Feed -
B GRN 19 Left Rear
C LT GRN 24 Back - Up Lamp Feed
D — — Not Used
E BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
Tail and Stop Lamp, Right Underhood Lamp
u a
CD
m
iS
>
o
236398
Connector Part • 12065861 Connector Part 12162000

Information • 5F Metri-Pack 280 Information 2 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Series (BLK) Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No, Function
A BLK 150 Ground Electronic Control Unit
Stop/Turn Lamp Feed - Output-12 Volt-
B GRN 19 ORN 1732 Inadvertant Load
Right Rear
Control
C LT GRN : 24 Back - Up Lamp Feed
D — . ' Not Used
E BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
Diagnostic Info rmation and Procedures
Headlight System Check
Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
1. Turn the headlamp switch to • The low beam headlamps are on. • Headlamps Inoperative -
the HEAD position. • The high beam headlamps Left Low Beam
2. Position the headlamp dimmer are off. • Headlamps Inoperative -
switch to the LOW beam Low and High Beams
position. (Daytime Running Lamps)
• Headlamps Inoperative -
High Beams
1
(Daytime Running Lamps)
Right Low Beam
One Lamp
• Headlamps Inoperative - Low
and High Beams (Headlamps)
Position the headlamp dimmer • The high beam headlamps • Headlamps Inoperative ~
switch to the HIGH beam position. are on. One Lamp
• The high beam indicator is on. • Headlamps Inoperative -
• The low beam headlamps are off. High Beams
(Daytime Running Lamps)
2 High Beams (Headlamps)
Left High Beam
• High Beam Indicator Inoperative
(Headlamps)
• Headlamps Inoperative - Low
and High Beams (Headlamps)
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.
DRL System Check

1. Ensure headlamp switch is in 1. DRL indicator illuminates • DRL Headlamps Inoperative
the OFF position. 2. LOW beam headlamps • DRL Indicator Inoperative
1 2. Ensure park brake is illuminate.
disengaged. 3. Park and tail lamps remain OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch to the ON
position.
1. Turn headlamp switch to the 1. DRL indicator turns OFF. • High Beam Indicator Inoperative
ON position. 2. Headlamps alternate between (Daytime Running Lamps)
2. Alternate dimmer switch HIGH and LOW beams. 9 DRL Headlamps Always On
2
between HIGH and LOW beam 3. Park and tail lamps illuminate. • Headlamps Inoperative -
positions. High Beams
4. High beam indicator illuminates
in the high beam position. (Daytime Running Lamps)
1. Turn the headlamp switch to 1. Headlamps turn OFF. • DRL Headlamps Always On
3 the OFF position. 2. DRL headlamps turn OFF. • Headlamps, DRL On With Park
2. Engage the parking brake. 3. DRL indicator turns OFF Brake Applied
Fog Lights System Check
1. Place headlamp switch in the 1. Park lamps light. • Fog Lamp Indicator Inoperative
PARK position. 2. Fog lamps light. • Fog Lamps Inoperative - All
1
2. Depress the top portion of the 3. Fog lamp switch indicator lights.
fog lamp switch.
1. Place the headlamp switch in 1. Headlamps light and alternate • Fog Lamps Inoperative - All
the headlamp position. between the HIGH and • Fog Lamps Always On
2. Alternate the headlamp dimmer LOW beams.
2
switch between the HIGH and 2. Fog lamps light in the LOW
LOW beam positions. beam position and turn off in the
HIGH beam position.
1. Depress the bottom portion of 1. Fog lamps turn OFF. Fog Lamps Always On
the fog lamp switch. 2. Fog lamp indicator turns OFF.
3
2. Turn the headlamp switch OFF. 3. Headlamps and park lamps
turn OFF.
Exterior Lights System Check

Turn the headlamp switch to the • Park and side marker lamps light. • Stop Lamps Always On (Pickup)
PARK position.
• Tail lamps light. • Stop Lamps Always On
• License lamps light. (Suburban/Utility)
• Clearance lamps light • Clearance Lamps Inoperative
(if equipped). • Endgate Identification Lamps
• Roof marker lamps light Inoperative
1
(if equipped). • License Lamps Inoperative
• Endgate identification lamps (One Lamp)
light (if equipped). • License Lamps Inoperative
(Both Lamps)
• Roof Marker Lamps Inoperative
• Marker Lamps Inoperative
1. Depress the brake pedal. 1. Stoplamps and the CHMSL light • Stop Lamps Inoperative -
2. Release the brake pedal. when the brake pedal is All (Pickup)
depressed. • Stop Lamps Inoperative -
2. Stoplamps and the CHMSL turn All (Suburban/Utility)
2 OFF when the brake pedal is • Stop Lamps Inoperative -
released. Center High Mounted
• Stop Lamps Always On -
Center High Mounted
3 Depress the hazard lamp switch. Front and rear hazard lamps flash. Hazard Lamps Inoperative
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 1. LH turn signals and indicator • Turn Signal Indicators
ON position. flash while in the LH turn Inoperative
2. Position the turn signal lever to position. • Turn Signal Lamps Inoperative -
4
the LH turn position. 2. RH turn signals and indicator Left or Right Side
3. Position the turn signal lever to flash while in the RH turn
the RH turn position. position.
Place the spotlamp switch in the ON The spotlamp lights. Spotlamp Inoperative
5 position (if equipped).
6 Open the vehicle’s hood. The underhood lamp lights. Underhood Lamp Inoperative
Backup Lights System Check
Step ion mal Result(s) Abnormal Results' ■■
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Both of the backup lamps illuminate. Backup Lamps Inoperative
ON position.
2. Automatic transmissions -
Depress the brake pedal and
1 move the control lever to the
REVERSE position. Manual
transmissions - Depress the
clutch pedal and place the
shifter into REVERSE position.
Automatic transmissions - depress Both of the backup lamps turn OFF. Backup Lamps Always On
brake pedal and move the control
lever to the PARK position. Manual
2
transmissions - depress the clutch
pedal and and place the shifter into
NETURAL
Interior Lamps System Check

Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Resuit(s)*
Place the courtesy lamp switch All of the interior lamps are off. Courtesy or Dome Lamps Always On
1 in OFF.
Place the courtesy lamp switch The courtesy lamps turn on. Courtesy or Dome Lamps Always On
2
in. ON.
Open and close each door one at • The courtesy lamps turn on for • Courtesy or Dome Lamps
a time. approximately 25 seconds. Always On
3
• The courtesy lamps fade out • Courtesy or Dome Lamps
each time Inoperative
Press the unlock button on the • Courtesy lamps turn on for • Courtesy or Dome Lamps
keyless entry transmitter. approximately 40 seconds. Always On
4
• Courtesy lamps fade out. • Courtesy or Dome Lamps
Inoperative
1. Open the IP compartment. The IP compartment lamp turns on IP Compartment Lamp Inoperative
once the compartment is open, then
5 2. Close the IP compartment turns off when the compartment
is shut.
1. Turn each reading switch • The reading lamps turn on. Vanity Mirror Lamps Inoperative
to ON. • The sunshade mirrors lamp
6 2. Open each sunshade turn on.
mirror cover. • The sunshade mirror lamp
3. Close each sunshade goes out.
mirror cover.
Place the headlamp switch in the 1. The component illumination ® Component Illumination Lamps
PARK position. lamps light. Inoperative
7
2. The ashtray lamp lights. • Courtesy Lamps Inoperative -
Ashtray
Interior Lights Dimming System Check
Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)
• Instrument Panel Lamps
1. Park lamps light. Inoperative.
1
Place the headlamp and panel 2. The dimmable interior • Instrument Panel Lamps Inop in
dimmer switch in the PARK position. lamps light. Parade Mode.
Rotate the panel dimmer switch in The dimmable interior lamps increase Instrument Panel Lamps Do
both directions to increase and and decrease brightness in direct Not Dim.
2
decrease the brightness of the response to the panel dimmer switch
interior lamps. position.
Backup Lamps Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Backup Lights System Check? Go to Backup
1 — Lights
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the park/neutral position switch
(automatic) backup lamp switch (manual) connector.
2. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
2 —
3. Connect a J 34142-B from terminal C (automatic) or
terminal B (manual) to ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p S Go to Step 4
Connect a J 39200 DMM from the switch connector,
3 terminal F (automatic) or terminal A (manual) to ground. —
Is there continuity? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Repair the open in CKT 139 (PNK) between the instrument
panel fuse block and the park/neutral position switch Go to Backup
4 (automatic), backup lamp switch (manual). —
Lights
Is the repair complete? System Check
• Replace the backup lamp switch (manual).
5 • Replace the park/neutral position switch and the ■ — Go to Backup —
backup lamp switch (automatic). Lights
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 24 (LT GRN) between the
backup lamp switch and the backup lamps.
6 _ Go to Backup
2, Repair the open in CKT 24 (LT GRN), as necessary. Lights
Did you find and correct a condition? System Check Go to Step 7
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the backup Go to Backup
7 lamps and ground G401. — Lights —
Backup Lamps Always On
Did you perform the Backup Lights System Check? Go to Backup
1 — Lights
2. Place the gear selector in REVERSE.
2 3. Disconnect the park/neutral position switch —
(automatic), backup lamp switch (manual).
Do the backup lamps turn off? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Locate and repair the short to B+ in CKT 24 (LT GRN)
between thew park/neutral position switch (automatic), Go to Backup
3 backup lamp switch (manual) and the backup lamps. — —
Lights
Replace the park/neutral position switch (automatic), Go to Backup
4 backup lamp switch (manual). — Lights —
Clearance Lamps Inoperative

DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the park and tail lamp are inoperative and one or more
clearance lamps are inoperative.
Did you perform the Exterior Lights System Check? Go to Exterior
1 — Lights
1... One at a time, remove the bulb from the affected
clearance lamp(s).
2 2. Connect a J 39200 between CKT 150 (BLK) and —
ground.
1. Connect a J 39200 between cavity B for CKT 9 (BRN)
at each lamp and ground.
3 2. Place the headlamp and panel dimmer switch in the —
PARK lamps position.
Is there battery voltage? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
Replace the affected clearance lamp bulbs. Go to Exterior
4 Is the repair complete? .— ■ ■ Lights —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the affected Go to Exterior
5 clearance lamp and G401. — : Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the affected Go to Exterior
6 clearance lamp and S412 (LH) or S413 (RH) — Lights —
Component Illumination Lamps Inoperative
Tools Required
• J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM
• J 3 4 1 4 2 - B Test Light
Did you perform the Interior Lamps System Check? Go to Interior
1 — Lamps
Turn the headlamp and the panel dimmer switch to the
PARK position.
2 .. — .
Are the park lamps and all of the component illumination
lamps inoperative? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Connect a test lamp between the headlamp and the panel
3 dimmer switch CKT 9 (BRN) cavity 5 to ground. - — :
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 9
Connect a test lamp between CKT 9 (BRN) at the affected
4 illumination lamp(s) and ground. ■— -■
Connect a test lamp between CKT 150 (BLK) at the
5 affected illumination lamp(s) and B+. — ■
Replace the affected component illumination lamp(s). Go to Interior
6 Is the repair complete? Lamps —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the headlamp
and the panel dimmer switch and the affected component Go to Interior
7 illumination lamp(s). —■
Lamps
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the affected Go to Interior
8 lamp(s) and ground. — Lamps —
Connect a test lamp between the headlamp and the panel
9 dimmer switch CKT 240 (ORN) cavity H and ground. —
Replace the headlamp and the panel dimmer switch. Go to Interior
10 Is the repair complete? :— Lamps —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 240 (ORN) between the IP fuse Go to Interior
11 block and the headlamp and panel dimmer switch. — ■- Lamps —
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the headlamp Go to Interior
12 and the panel dimmer switch and splice S210. — Lamps —
Is the repair complete? System Chet1
Courtesy Lamps Inoperative - Ashtray
Tools Required
• J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM
• J 3 4 1 4 2 - 1 3 Test Light
DEFINITION: Use this diagnostic in order to diagnose the ashtray lamp only if the other component illumination lamps are
operative.
1 — Lamps
Go to Step 3 S y s t e m Check
1. Remove the ashtray lamp bulb.

2. Place the headlamp switch in the Park position.
2 3. Connect a test lamp between the ashtray lamp —
terminal A and ground.
Does the test lamp light? Goto . S te p 3 Go to Step 5
Connect a test lamp between the ashtray lamp
3 terminals A and B. —
Replace the ashtray lamp assembly. Go to Interior
4 Is the repair complete? — Lamps —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 9 (TAN) between the ashtray lamp Go to Interior
5 and splice S210. — Lamps __
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the ashtray Go to Interior
6 lamp and splice S218. — Lamps —
Is the repair complete? S y s te m C h e c k
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Inoperative

Step Action Value(s)"'.. Yet No
1 — Lamps
Move the courtesy lamp switch to the ON position.
2 —
Do all of the lamps light? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
3 Do some of the lamps light? — Go to Step 14 Go to Step 6
1. Move the courtesy lamp switch to the OFF position.
2. Move the dome lamp defeat switch to the OFF
position.
4 —
3. While opening and closing each door, observe Go to Interior
the lamps. Lamps
Do all of the lamps light when each door is open? System Check Go to S t e p 5
Are the lamps inoperative only when certain doors
5 — Go to Step 15 Go to Step 8
are open?
Using a test lamp, backprobe the front dome lamp
6 connector with a test lamp from CKT 40 (ORN) to ground. —
Using a J 34142-B, backprobe the headlamp and panel
7 dimmer switch connector from cavity M to ground. —
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Inoperative (cont’d)
1. Open the door.
2. Ensure that the dome defeat switch is in the OFF
position.
8 3. Disconnect the interior lamp control module —
connector.
4. Connect a self-powered test lamp from the interior
lamp control module connector, cavity B, to ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 11 Go to S t e p 9
1. Disconnect the headlamp and panel dimmer switch
connector.
9 2. Connect a self-powered test lamp from the headlamp —
and panel dimmer switch, cavity B, to the interior
lamp control module connector, cavity B.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 1 0 Go to S t e p 1 9
1. Reconnect the headlamp and panel dimmer switch
connector.
10 2. Using a self-powered test lamp, backprobe from —
cavity B to cavity L.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 2 0 Goto S t e p 2 1
With the interior lamp control module connector
disconnected, connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from cavity E to
11 ground. —
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B between the interior lamp control
12 module, cavity C, and ground. —
Connect a self-powered test lamp between the interior
13 lamp control module, cavity D, and ground. —
1. Inspect for an open in the appropriate circuit:
• CKT 40 (ORN) between the splice and the
affected lamp
• CKT 156 (WHT) between the splice and the
14 affected lamp —
• CKT 150 (BLK) between the affected lamp and
ground G400.
Go to In te r io r
2. Repair the circuit, as necessary. Lam ps
Did you find and correct a condition? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S te p 2 6
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 328 (PPL) between the
splice and the affected door jamb switch.
15 — Go to In te r io r
Did you find and correct a condition? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S t e p 2 7
Repair the open in CKT 40 (ORN) between splice S242 Go to In te r io r
16 and the instrument panel fuse block. — Lam ps —
Repair the open in CKT 156 (WHT) between the headlamp Go to In te r io r
17 and panel dimmer switch and splice S209. — Lam ps —
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the

headlamp and panel dimmer switch and
18 ground G200. — Go to In te r io r
2. Repair the circuit, necessary. Lam ps
Did you find and correct the condition? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S t e p 2 1
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Valise(s) Yes Ho
Repair the open in CKT 157 (GRY) between the headlamp
and panel dimmer switch and the interior lamp control Go to Interior
19 module. —
Lamps
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the headlamp Go to Interior
20 and panel dimmer switch and ground G200. — Lamps —
-
Replace the headlamp and panel dimmer switch. Go to' Interior
21 Is the repair complete?
— Lamps —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 156 (BLK) between the interior Go to Interior
22 lamp control module and splice S246. — Lamps —
Repair the open in CKT 40 (ORN) between the interior Go to Interior
23 lamp control module and splice S248. —- Lamps —
is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the interior lamp control module. Go to Interior
24 Is the repair complete? ■— Lamps —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the interior Go to Interior
25 lamp control module and ground G202. Lamps —
Replace the affected lamp. Go to Interior
26 — Lamps —
Is the repair complete?
System Check
Replace the affected door jamb switch. Go to Interior
System Check
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Always On

Step Action \ ilue(s) Yes Mo
DEFINITION: Use this diagnostic in order to diagnose the Dome and/or Courtesy Lamps Always On with all vehicle doors
closed and the dome lamp switch in the OFF position. On vehicles equipped with remote keyless entry or an interior lamp
control module will cause the interior lamps to remain in the ON position after the door is opened for approximately
40 seconds or until an ignition ON cycle has occurred.
1 — Lamps
Go to Step 2 System Chec/
1. Close the vehicle doors.

2 2. Disconnect the headlamp and the panel dimmer —
switch.
Do the courtesy and/or dome lamps turn OFF? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 7
1. Close the vehicle doors.
2. Connect a J 39200, set on Ohms, between the
3 headlamp and the panel dimmer switch connector —
cavity L and ground.
4 Is the vehicle a suburban/utility with cargo doors? — Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5
1. Repair the short to ground in CKT 328 (PPL) between
the headlamp and the panel dimmer switch and door
jamb switches.
5 — —
2. If no short to ground is found, replace the faulty door Go to Interior
jamb switches. Lamps
Courtesy or Dome Lamps Always On (cont’d)
Replace the headlamp and the panel dimmer switches. Go to Interior
System Check
Disconnect the interior lamp control module or the keyless
7 entry module. —
Do the courtesy and/or dome lamps turn OFF? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 11
Connect a J 39200, set on Ohms, between CKT 157
(GRY) at cavity B of the interior lamp control or cavity K of
8 the keyless entry module and ground. —
Repair the short to ground in CKT 157 (GRY) between the
headlamp and the panel dimmer switch and the interior Go to Interior
9 lamp control module or the keyless entry module. — —
Lamps
Replace the interior lamp control module or the keyless Go to Interior
10 entry module. __ Lamps _
Repair the short to ground in CKT 156 (WHT) between the
headlamp and the panel dimmer switch and the dome
11 and/or courtesy lamps, the interior lamp control module or — Go to Interior —
the keyless entry module. Lamps
With a J 39200 still connected at the headlamp and the
panel dimmer switch cavity L and ground, disconnect the
12 door lock control module. — '
Is there still continuity? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 13
Connect a J 39200, set on Ohms, between the door lock
13 control module connector cavity F and ground. —
1. Repair the short to ground in CKT 1897 (ORN/BLK)
between the door lock control module and the rear
door jamb switch.
14 — —
2. If no short to ground is found, replace the rear door Go to Interior
jamb switch. Lamps
Replace the door lock control module. Go to Interior
15 Is the repair complete? — Lamps
System Check
DRL Headlamps Always On

Step cfion Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the DRL System Check? Go to DRL
1 —
Go to Step 2 System C h e d r
Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
2 —
Is the daytime running lamps (DRL) indicator lit? Go to Step 3 Go to Steh' t
Disconnect the DRL module.
3 —
Is the DRL indicator lit? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 0
Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
4 —
Do the DRL disable? Go to Step 7 Go to S t e p 8
Remove the DRL relay from the convenience center.
5 —
Do the DRL disable? Go to Step 9 Go to S t e p 1 0
Replace the DRL module. Refer to DRL Control Module
6 Replacement — Go to DRL — |
DRL Headlamps Always On (cont’d)
Replace the instrument cluster. Refer to IP Cluster
7 Replacement in Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console. — Go to DRL —
Repair the short to ground in CKT 592 between the
8 instrument cluster and the convenience cluster. — Go to DRL —
Replace the DRL relay. Refer to DRL Relay Replacement. Go to DRL
9 — —
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 12 (TAN) between the
convenience center and the left high/low beam headlamp
10 (base headlamps) and the left high beam headlamp — —
(quad headlamps). Go to DRL
DRL Headlamps Inoperative

1 — Go to S t e p 2
S y s te m C h e c k
1. Ensure that the park brake is not engaged.
2 2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. —
Does the brake indicator lamp light? Go to S t e p 1 2 Go to S t e p 3
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the daytime running lamps (DRL) module
connector.
3 3. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. —
4. Connect a test lamp from the DRL module connector,
cavity C, to ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 4 Go to S t e p 1 3
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from cavity C to cavity H of the DRL
4 module connector. —
1. Remove the DRL relay from the convenience center.
5 2. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B the DRL relay, cavity G6, to —
ground.
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from the DRL relay, cavity G4, to
6 ground. —
2. Reconnect the DRL module connector.
7 —
3. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the DRL indicator lamp light? Go to S t e p 8 Go to S t e p 1 7
1. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 from the DRL relay,
cavity H6, to B+.
8 Battery Voltage
2. Measure the voltage.
Is there battery voltage? Go to S t e p 9 Go to S t e p 1 8
Connect a fused jumper from cavity G6 to cavity H4 of the
9 DRL relay. —
Do the low beam headlights light? Go to S t e p 1 9 Go to S t e p 1 0
DHL Headlamps Inoperative (cont’d)
1. Re-install the DRL relay.
10 3. Disconnect the headlamp connector. —
4. Connect a test lamp from cavity C (base) or cavity A
(quad) to ground.
Connect a J 39200, set on ohms, between cavity A and
11 ground. —
Refer to Park Brake for diagnosis. Go to DRL
12 — —
Did you find and correct the condition? System Check
Repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between the instrument
13 panel (IP) fuse block and the DRL module. — Go to DRL —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the DRL
14 module and ground G200. — Go to DRL —
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 340 (ORN) between the
IP fuse block and D203.
2. If an open is not found, inspect for an open in
CKT 634 (YEL) between D203 and the convenience
15 center. — —
3. If an open is not found, locate and replace
diode D203. Go to DRL
Repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between splice S213
16 and the convenience center. — Go to DRL —
1. Inspect for a poor connection or damaged terminals
at the DRL module connector.
2. Repair the DRL module connector, as necessary.
17 — —
3. If you do not find a condition at the connector,
replace the DRL module. Go to DRL
Repair the open in CKT 592 (LT GRN/BLK) between the
18 DRL module and the convenience center. — Go to DRL —
Replace the DRL relay. Refer to DRL Relay Replacement Go to DRL
19 — —
Repair the open in CKT 12 (TAN) between the DRL relay
20 and left high/low beam headlamps. — Go to DRL —
Replace the left and/or the right high/low beam headlamp.
21 Refer to Headlamp Replacement — Go to DRL —
Repair the open in CKT 150 between the left high/low
beam headlamp and ground G113, and/or repair the open
22 in CKT 250 (BLK) between the right high/low beam — —
headlamp and ground G112. Go to DRL
DRL indicator Inoperative
1 — Go to Step 2 System Check
2. Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
2 3. Connect a J 34142-B from the instrument cluster —
connector, cavity 4, to B+.
3 2. Connect a J 34142-B from the instrument cluster —
connector, cavity 17, to ground.
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the instrument
4 cluster and splice S204. — Go to DRL —
Is the repair complete? System C h e c k
Replace the instrument cluster. Refer to IP Cluster
5 Replacement in Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console. — Go to DRL —
Repair open in the CKT 592 (LT GRN/BLK) between the
instrument cluster and daytime running lamps (DRL)
6 module. — —
Go to DRL
Fog Lamps Always On

Did you perform the Fog Lights System Check? Go to Fog Lights
Remove the fog lamp relay.
2 —
Do the fog lamps turn off? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Disconnect the fog lamp switch connector.
3 —
Do the fog lamps turn off? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 34 (PPL) between the
fog lamp switch, the left fog lamp, the right fog lamp and
4 the convenience center. — —
Go to Fog Lights
Replace the fog lamp switch, Go to Fog Lights
5 — —
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 317 (YEL) between the
6 fog lamp switch and the convenience center. — Go to Fog Lights —
Fog Lamps Inoperative - All
Step Action [ Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the headlamp and the park lamp systems are functioning
properly. If any faults are present with those systems, they must be repaired first.
Did you perform the Fog Lights System Check? Go to F o g L ig h ts
1 .. — Go to S t e p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
1. Remove the fog lamp relay from the convenience
center.
3. Place the headlamp and panel dimmer switch in the
2 PARK position. —
4. Press the fog lamp switch to the ON position.
5. Connect a test lamp from the fog lamp relay,
cavity G1, to ground.
Backprobe the fog lamp switch connector with a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B
3 from cavity B to ground. —
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 1 0 Go to S t e p 4
Backprobe the fog lamp switch connector with a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B
4 from cavity D to ground. .
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 6 Goto S t e p 5
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the fog lamp
5 switch and S210. — Go to F o g L ig h ts —
Replace the fog lamp switch. Go to F o g L ig h ts
6 — —.
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from cavity G1 to cavity H3 of the
7 fog lamp relay. . —. .
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from fog lamp relay, cavity H1, to
8 ground. — .
Connect a fuse jumper from cavity H1 to cavity G3 of the
9 fog lamp relay. —
Do the fog lamps light? Go to S t e p 1 3 Go to S t e p 1 4
Repair the open in CKT 317 (YEL) between the fog lamp
10 switch and the convenience center. — ; Go to F o g L ig h ts
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between the fog
11 lamp relay and S225. — Go to F o g L ig h ts —
Repair the open in CKT 340 (ORN) between the
12 instrument panel fuse block and the convenience center. — Go to F o g L ig h ts —
Replace the fog lamp relay. Go to F o g L ig h ts
13 — —
Repair the open in CKT 34 (PPL) between the
14 convenience center and splice S126. — Go to F o g L ig h ts —
Fog Lamp Indicator Inoperative
Did you perform the Fog Lights System Check? Go to Fog Lights
1 — Go to Step 2 System C het '
1. Access the fog lamp switch connector.
2. Connect a J 34142-B from the fog lamp switch
2 connector, cavity E, to ground. —
3. Depress the fog lamp switch.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 4 £ o to Step 3
Repair the open in CKT 34 (PPL) between the fog lamp
3 switch and splice S165. — Go to Fog Lights —
Inspect CKT 150 (BLK) between the fog lamp switch and
4 G200 for an open circuit and repair as necessary. — Go to Fog Lights
Did you find and correct the condition? System Check Go to Step 5
Replace the fog lamp switch. Go to Fog Lights
5 — —
Hazard Lamps Inoperative

Did you perform the Exterior Lamps System Check? Go to Exterior
1 — Lights
2 2. Place the turn signal in the ON position. — ■■
Does the turn signal operate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 3
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 139 (PNK) at
3 connector C266, terminal A2, to ground.
1. Ensure that the turn signal is in the ON position.
4 2. Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 1508 (LT BLU) at
connector C266, terminal A3, to ground.
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 1508 (LT BLU) and
CKT 150 (BLK) at the turn/hazard flasher, terminal H9 to
5 terminal G8. —
1. Ensure that the turn signal is in the ON position.
6 2. Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 1508 (LT BLU) at the —
turn signal/hazard flasher, terminal H9, to ground.
1. Turn the turn signal to the OFF position.
2. Connect a self-powered test lamp from CKT 1697
7 (PPL) from the turn/hazard flasher, terminal H7, to —
connector C266, terminal E9.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 11 j c to Step 13
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 140 (ORN) at
8 connector C266, terminal E8, to ground. —
Does the test lamp light? V-:o to Step 9 Go to Step 1 /
1. Turn the hazard switch to the ON position.
9 2. Connect a test lamp from CKT 1696 (GRY) at —
connector C266, terminal E1, and ground
Hazard Lamps Inoperative (cont’d)
Step .Action Value(s) Yes Mo
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 1696 (GRY) at the
10 turn/hazard flasher, terminal H8, and ground. —
1. Turn the hazard switch to the ON position.
2. Reconnect the turn/hazard flasher.
11 3. Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 1697 (PPL) at —
connector C266, terminal E9, and ground.
Repair the open in CKT 139 (PNK) between the instrument Go to Exterior
12 panel fuse block and connector C266. —- Lights —
Replace the turn/hazard switch. Go to Exterior
13 Is the repair complete?
— Lights —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to Exterior
14 turn/hazard flasher and ground G200. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 1508 (LT BLU) between the Go to Exterior
15 turn/hazard flasher and ground G200. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 1697 (PPL) between the Go to Exterior
16 turn/hazard flasher and connector C266. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 139 (ORN) between Go to Exterior
17 connector C26.6 and the instrument panel fuse block. — Lights
Replace the run/hazard flasher. Go to Exterior
18 Is the repair complete? — Lights —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 1696 (GRY) between the Go to Exterior
19 turn/hazard flasher and connector C266. — Lights —
Headlamps Inoperative - Left Low Beam

Step r-.ctior Val ue(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Headlight System Check? Go to Headlight
1 — Go to Step 2 System Check !
1. Disconnect the left low beam headlamp connector.
2. Connect a J 39200 between the left low beam
2 headlamp connector, cavity A (base), cavity B (quad)
for CKT 150 (BLK) and ground.
headlamp position.
2. Operate the headlamp dimmer switch in order to
select the low beam position.
3 —
3. Connect a J 34142-B between the left low beam
headlamp connector, cavity C (base) cavity A (quad)
for CKT 12 (TAN) and ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step t>
Headlamps Inoperative - Left Low Beam (cont’d)
Step ction Value(s) Yes No
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the left low
4 beam headlamp and G113. — Go to Headlight —
If the filament is not open, replace the left low beam
5 headlamp socket. — Go to Headlight —
Repair the open in CKT 12 (TAN) between S120 and the
6 left low beam headlamp. — Go to Headlight —
Headlamps Inoperative - Right Low Beam

Step Action Value(s) Yes : No
Did you perform the Headlights System Check? Go to Headlight
1. Disconnect the right low beam headlamp connector.

2. Connect a J 39200 between the right low beam
2 headlamp connector, cavity A (base), cavity B (quad) —
for CKT 250 (BLK), and ground.
headlamp position.
select the low beam position.
3 —
3. Connect a J 34142-B between the right low beam
headlamp connector, cavity B (base), cavity A (quad)
for CKT 12 (TAN), and ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 !
Repair the open in CKT 250 (BLK) between the right low
If the filament is not open, replace the right low beam
5 headlamp socket. — Go to Headlight —
Repair the open in CKT 12 (TAN) between S120 and the
6 right low beam headlamp. — , Go to Headlight —
Headlamps Inoperative - Low Beams

DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the high beam headlamps are operating properly and the low
beams are inoperative.
1. Turn the headlamp and panel dimmer switch to the
ON position.
2. Move the headlamp dimmer switch to the LOW
2 position. —
3. Backprobe the headlamp dimmer switch connector
with a J 34142-B from cavity A to ground.
1. Remove the daytime running lamp relay.
3 2. Connect a J 34142-B at cavity G5 to ground. —
Headlamps Inoperative - Low Beams (cont’d)
1. Re-install the daytime running lamp relay.
2. Backprobe cavity B at the high/low beam headlamp
4 with the headlamp dimmer switch in the LOW —
position.
Replace the headlamp dimmer switch. Go to Headlight
5 — —
Repair the open in CKT 359 (PPL) between the headlamp
6 dimmer switch and the daytime running lamp relay. — Go to Headlight —
Replace the high/low beam headlamps. Go to Headlight
7 — ■ —
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 12 (TAN) between the
daytime running lamp relay and S120, repair as
necessary.
8 2. Replace the daytime running lamp relay if no open — —
was found in CKT 12 (TAN) between the daytime
running lamp relay and S120. Go to Headlight
Headlamps Inoperative - Left High Beam

1 ■ — Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the left high beam headlamp connector.
2. Connect a J 39200 between the left high beam
1. Place the headlamp and the panel dimmer switch in
the headlamp position.
2. Operate the headlamp and dimmer switch in order to
select the high beam position.
3 —
3. Connect a J 34142-B between the left high beam
for CKT 11 (GRN), and ground.
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the left high
Replace the left high beam headlamp socket if the filament
5 is not open. — Go to Headlight —
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between S121 and
6 the left high beam headlamp. — Go to Headlight —
Headlamps Inoperative - Right High Beam
1. Disconnect the right high beam headlamp connector.
2. Connect a J 39200 between the right high beam
Is there continuity? Go to Step 3 Go Step 4
headlamp position.
3 —
3. Connect a J 34142-B between the right high beam
for CKT 11 (LT GRN), and ground. '
Does the test lamp light? ~Go to Step 5 Go to S(ep 6
Repair the open in CKT 250 (BLK) between the right high
Replace the right high beam headlamp socket if the
5 filament is not open. — Go to Headlight —
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between S121 and
6 the right high beam headlamp. — Go to Headlight
Headlamps Inoperative - High Beams (Daytime Running Lamps)

Step Action | Value(s) |! Yes |! No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should be used only if the low beam headlamps are operating properly and the high
beams are inoperative.
ON position.
2. Place the headlamp dimmer switch to the HIGH
2 position. —
3. Backprobe the headlamp dimmer switch connector
with a J 34142-B from cavity C to ground.
1. Disconnect high beam headlamp connector.
3 2. Connect a J 34142-B between cavity B (base), —
cavity A (quad), and ground.
Does test lamp light? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between the
4 headlamp dimmer switch and the headlamp. — Go to Headlight —
Replace the headlamp dimmer switch. Go to Headlight
5 — —
Connect a J 34142-B between headlamp connector
6 cavity A and cavity B. —
Does test lamp light? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 3
Replace high beam headlamps. Go to Headlight __
7 —
Locate and repair open in CKT 150 (BLK) (LH), and
CKT 250 (BLK), (RH), between headlamp connector and
8 ground. — —
Go to Headlight
Headlamps Inoperative - High Beams (Headlamps)
Step Action Value(s) Yes Mo
1. Disconnect connector C266 at the steering column.
2. Connect a self-powered test lamp between cavity E13
for CKT 10 (YEL) and cavity E11 for CKT 11
2 (LT GRN) of connector C266. —
3. Operate the headlamp switch at least twice.
4. Select the high beam position.
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between
3 connector C266 and splice S121. — Go to Headlight — '
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) in the steering
4 column. — Go to Headlight
If the circuit is not open, replace the headlamp switch.
5 Refer to Headlamp Switch Replacement. — Go to Headlight
Headlamps Inoperative - One Lamp

Step Action Value(s) Yes . No
— Go to Step 2
1 System Check
Connect a J 34142-B from the inoperative headlamp
connector, cavity B in vehicles with quad headlamps, or
2 cavity A in vehicles with base headlamps, to B+. —
3 Is the inoperative headlamp a low beam headlamp? — Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) (LH), or CKT 250
4 (BLK), (RH) between the affected headlamp and ground. — Go to Headlight —
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 12 (TAN) between the
headlamp and splice S120.
5 —
2. Repair the wiring, as necessary. Go to Headlight
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between the
headlamp and splice S120. —
6
2. Repair the wiring, as necessary. Go to Headlight
Replace the headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement Go to Headlight
7 —
Headlamps Inoperative - Low and. High Beams.(Daytime Running Lam
step Action Value(s) Yes ML)
Did you perform the Headlights System Check? Go to H e a d l i g h t
1 — Go to S t e p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the ON position.

2 2. Backprobe the headlamp and panel dimmer switch ■ —
connector with a test lamp from cavity G to ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 3 Go to Step 4 ;
1. Disconnect the headlamp dimmer switch connector.
3 2. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from the headlamp dimmer —
switch connector, cavity D, to ground.
Does the test l amp light? Go to S t e p 5 Go to Step 6
Replace the headlamp and panel dimmer swi tch. Go to H e a d l i g h t
4 — —
Replace the headl amp dimmer switch. Go to H e a d l i g h t
5 — —
Repair the open in CKT 10 (YEL) between the headlamp
6 and panel dimmer switch. — Go to H e a d l i g h t —
I s the repair complete? S y s te m C h e c k
Headlamps Inoperative - Low and High Beams (Headlamps)

Step ActSon Value(s) Yes No
1 — . Go to Step 2
System Check
1. Disconnect connector C266.
2. Connect a J 39200, set on ohms, between
connector C266, cavity E13 for CKT 10 (YEL), and
2 cavity E12 for CKT 12 (TAN). —
3. Operate the headlamp switch at least twice.
1. Disconnect the headlamp switch connector.
2. Connect a J 39200 between C266, cavity E13, and
3 the headlamp and panel dimmer switch connector, —
cavity G for CKT 10 (YEL).
Connect a J 34142-B between the headlamp and panel
dimmer switch connector, cavity C for CKT 42 (RED), and
4 ground. ■ —
Repair an open in CKT 10 (YEL) or in CKT 12 (TAN) in
. ...5: the steering column. — Go to Headlight
Did you find and repair the condition? System Check Go to Step 7
Repair the open in CKT 10 (YEL) between the headlamp
6 and panel dimmer switch and connector C266. — Go to Headlight —
Did you find and repair the condition? System Check
Replace the headlamp switch. Refer to Headlamp Switch
7 Replacement — Go to Headlight —
Repair the open in CKT 42 (RED) between the underhood
fuse-relay center and the headlamp and panel dimmer
8 switch. — —
Go to Headlight
Did you find and repair the condition? System Check
Headlamps, DRL Qn With Park Brake Applied
1 '— Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Ensure that the park brake is applied. '
2 2, Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. —
Does the BRAKE indicator light? Goto S te p 3 Go to Step 4
2. Disconnect the DRL module connector.
3 3. Connect a J 34142-B from the DRL module , . —
connector, cavity A, to B+.
Refer to Park Brake System Diagnosis. Go to H e a d l i g h t
4 ■ — —
Did you find and correct a condition? System Check
Replace the DRL module. Refer to DRL Control Module
5 R e p la c e m e n t — Go to H e a d l i g h t —
Is the repair complete?: System Check
Repair the open in CKT 1134 (LT BLU) between the park
6 brake switch and the DRL module. ' — Go to Headlight —
High Beam Indicator Inoperative (Daytime Running Lamps)

Step / otter. Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used to diagnose the high beam indicator only if the high beam
headlamps are operational.
1 ■ Go to Step 2 " "—
System Check
1. Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. V
2 ' " 2. Connect a J 34142-B from the instrument cluster
connector, cavity 4, to B+.
1. Move the headlamp and panel dimmer switch to the
ON position.
2. Move the headlamp dimmer switch to the HIGH
3 position. ' —
3. Connect a J 34142-B from the instrument cluster
. connector, cavity 5, to ground.
Repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT) between the
4 instrument panel connector and ground. — ...Go to DHL ..
Is the repair complete? . System Check
Inspect the high beam indicator beam bulb in order to
5 determine if the bulb is operative. -—
Is the bulb operative? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between the
6 instrument cluster connector and splice S225. — Go to DRL —
Replace the instrument cluster. Go to DRL
7 — —
Replace the high beam indicator bulb. Go to DRL
8 — —
High Beam Indicator inoperative (Headlamps)
headlamps position.
2. Observe that the headlamps are lit.
2 —
4. Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
5. Connect a J 34142-B between the instrument cluster
connector, cavity 5 for CKT 11 (LT GRN), and
ground.
Connect a self-powered J 34142-B between the instrument
cluster connector, cavity 4 for CKT 451 (BLK/WHT), and
3 ground. —
Repair the open in CKT 11 (LT GRN) between splice S125
4 and the instrument cluster. — Go to Headlight —
5 Is the high beam indicator bulb good? — Go to Step 7 —
Repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT) between the
6 instrument cluster and ground G103 or ground G104. — Go to Headlight —
Replace the instrument cluster. Go to Headlight
7 — —
Illuminated Entry Lamps Inoperative

Did you perform the Interior Lights System Check? Go to Interior
— Lamps
1 Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Close the doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
2 3. Using J 34142-B, backprobe cavity A of the interior —
lamp control module.
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 39 (PNK) to the Go to Interior
3 instrument panel fuse block. — Lamps —
Replace the interior lamp control module. Go to Interior
System Check
IP Compartment Lam p Inoperative
1 — Lamps
1. Disconnect the instrument panel (IP) compartment

box lamp connector.
2 2. Connect a J 34142-B from the IP compartment box —
lamp connector, cavity A, to B+.
1. Inspect for an open in CKT 40 (ORN) between the IP
compartment box lamp and the IP fuse block.
3 — Go to Interior
2. Repair the circuit, as necessary. Lamps
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the IP Go to Interior
4 compartment box lamp and G200. — Lamps —
Replace the IP compartment box lamp. Refer to IP Go to Interior
5 Compartment Lamp Replacement — Lamps —
Vanity Mirror Lamps Inoperative

Did you perform the Interior Lamps System Check? Go to In te r io r
1 — Lam ps
Go to S te p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 40 (ORN) from the
affected sunshade mirror lamp connector cavity A to
2 ground. —
Connect a self-powered test lamp from cavity B to B+.
3 —
Does the test lamp light? Go to S te p 5 Go to S te p 6
Repair the open in CKT 40 (ORN) from the affected Go to In te r io r
4 sunshade mirror lamp to the instrument panel fuse block. — Lam ps —
Replace the sunshade mirror lamp. Go to In te r io r
5 Is the repair complete? — Lam ps —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) from the sunshade Go to In te r io r
6 mirror lamp to ground G200. — Lam ps —
Underhood Lamp Inoperative

Did you perform the Exterior Lights System Check? Go to E x te r io r
1 — L ig h ts
Go to S t e p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
1. Disconnect the underhood lamp connector.
2 2. Connect a J 34142-B between the underhood lamp —
connector, cavity A, to ground.
Connect a J 34142-B between the underhood lamp
3 connector, cavity B and B+. —
Underhood Lamp Inoperative (cont’d)
Step . ction Value(s) Yes No
Repair the open in CKT 740 (ORN) between the Go to Exterior
4 underhood lamp and the underhood fuse-relay center. — Lights —
Replace the underhood (reel) lamp. Go to Exterior
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the underhood Go to Exterior
6 lamp and ground. — Lights —
Instrument Panel Lamps Inop in Parade Mode

1 — Lamps
1. Disconnect the headlamp and panel dimmer switch

connector.
PARK position.
2 3. Adjust the headlamp and panel dimmer switch to the .— ;
parade mode detent position.
4. Connect a self-powered test lamp between cavity H
and cavity N of the headlamp and panel dimmer
switch connector.
Repair the open in CKT 1382 (WHT) between the Go to Interior
3 headlamp and panel dimmer switch and splice S216. — Lamps —
Replace the headlamp and panel dimmer switch. Go to Interior
System Check
Instrument Panel Lamps Inoperative

1 — Lamps
Turn the headlamp and panel dimmer switch to the PARK
2 position. —
Do all the instrument cluster illumination lamps light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Move the headlamp and panel dimmer switch from the
dimmest position to the brightest position.
3 —
Does the intensity of the instrument cluster illumination
lamps change with the turning of the switch? System OK Go to Step 5
Are all of the instrument cluster illumination lamps
4 —
inoperative? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Replace the headlamp and panel dimmer switch. Go to Interior
5 Is the repair complete? — Lamps
System Check

brightest position,
6 2. Using a J 39200, measure the voltage from cavity D4 10.0 V
of the instrument panel fuse block, the ILLUM
fuse 14, to ground.
Does the DMM measure less the specified voltage? Go toStep 8 Go to Step 9
Instrument Panel Lamps Inoperative (cont’d)
1. Inspect for an open in the following circuits between
splice S217 and the affected lamps:
• CKT 8 (GRY)
7 —
• CKT 150 (BLK)
Go to In te r io r
2. Repair the open, as necessary. Lamps
Did you find and correct a condition? S y s te m Check Go to S t e p 1 0
1. Inspect for an open or high resistance in CKT 44
(DKGRN) or in CKT 8 (GRY) between the headlamp
8 and panel dimmer switch and splice S217. — Go to In te r io r
Did you find and correct a condition? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S t e p S
Repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK) and ground G103 or Go to In te r io r
9 ground G104. — Lam ps —
Replace the affected lamps. Go to In te r io r
10 Is the repair complete? — Lam ps
Endgate Identification Lamps Inoperative

Tools Required
• J 39200 DMM
• J 3 4 1 4 2 - B T e s t Light
DEFINITION:
Use this diagnostic in order to diagnose the endgate identification lamps only if the rear tailights are operative.
Did you perform the Exterior Lamps System Check? Go to E x te r io r
1 . _ _ .. L ig h ts
2. Place the headlamp switch in the Park Lamps
position.
2
3. Connect a test lamp between connector C408,
cavity A and ground.
Connect a test lamp across cavities A and B of
3 connector C408. — —
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 4
Replace the endgate identification lamp assembly. Go to E x te r io r
4 Is the repair complete? — L ig h ts —■
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the endgate Go to E x te r io r
5 identification lamps and splice S413. L ig h ts —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the endgate Go to E x te r io r
6 identification lamps and splice 8411. — L ig h ts —
Roof Marker Lamps Inoperative
ction ! Value(&) Yes Mo
Tools Reqi
• J 39200 DMM
• J 34142-B Test Light
DEFINITION:
Use this diagnostic in order to diagnose the roof marker lamps only if the park and the tail lamps are operative.
1 — Lights
Place the headlamp switch in the Park position.
2 —
Are all the roof marker lamps inoperative? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 8
1. Remove the left outside roof marker lamp bulb.
3 2. Connect a test lamp between cavity A and ground. —
Connect a test lamp across cavities A and B.
4
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go toStep 7
Replace the inoperative roof marker lamp bulbs and/or Go to Exterior
5 sockets. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the roof marker Go to Exterior
6 lamps and splice S210. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the roof Go to Exterior
7 marker lamps and splice S316. — Lights —
1. Inspect the inoperative roof marker lamp bulb(s).
2. Replace the roof marker lamp bulb(s) as needed.
8 3. Inspect the lamp sockets and the related wiring. — —
4. Replace or repair the lamp sockets and related wiring Go to Exterior
as needed. Lights
License Lamps Inoperative (One Lamp)

. Step
T Action Value(s) Yes No
1 — Lights
2 2. Connect a test lamp between the license lamp —
connector, cavity B for CKT 150 (BLK), and B+.
1. Connect a test lamp between the license lamp
connector, cavity A for CKT 9 (BRN), and ground.
park lamps position.
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the license Go to Exterior
4 lamp connector and ground G401. — - ‘ Lights ' —
Replace the license lamp bulb. Go to Exterior
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between splice S415 and Go to Exterior
6 the license lamp connector. — Lights —
License Lamps Inoperative (Both Lamps)
1 — Lights
2 dimmer switch, cavity H for CKT 240 (BRN), and ground. —
3 2. Connect a J 34142-B between the headlamp and —
panel dimmer switch connector, cavity S, and ground.
Repair the open in CKT 240 (BRN) between the
instrument panel fuse block and the headlamp and panel Go to Exterior
4 dimmer switch. — - —
Lights
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the headlamp Go to Exterior
5 and panel dimmer switch and splice S210. — Lights —
Replace the headlamp and panel dimmer switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
Marker Lamps Inoperative

: Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1 — Lights
1. Remove each roof marker lamp, one at a time.

2 2. Connect a self-powered test lamp between cavity B —
for CKT 250 (BLK) and ground.
1. Connect a J 34142-B between cavity A for CKT 9
(BRN) at each roof marker lamp and ground.
dimmer switch connector, cavity H, for CKT 240 (BRN)
4 and ground. —
1. Place the headlamp switch in the park lamps position.
5 2. Connect a J 34142-B between the headlamp and ■ _
panel dimmer switch connector, cavity S, and ground.
Repair the open in CKT 250 (BLK) between the Go to Exterior
6 malfunctioning lamp and ground G200. — Lights —
Replace the malfunctioning bulb. Go to Exterior
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between splice S210 and Go to Exterior
8 the lamps. — Lights __
Marker Lamps inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No .
Repair the open in CKT 240 (BRN) between the
instrument panel fuse block and headlamp and panel Go to Exterior
9 dimmer switch. — ■ —
Lights
Repair the open in CKT 9 (BRN) between the headlamp Go to Exterior
10 and panel dimmer switch and splice S225. — Lights —
11 Is the repair complete? — Lights .—
System Check
Park and Tail Lamps Inoperative

DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used to diagnose a complete failure of the park lamp system.
Was the Exterior Lamp System Check performed? - Go to Exterior
1 ■ — ' . Lights
- Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the headlamp and panel dimmer switch.
2 2. Connect a DMM, set on volts, between cavity H and —
ground.
Is there Battery voltage? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5
1. With the headlamp and panel dimmer switch
disconnected, place the switch in the park lamp
position.
3 ; — ''
2. Connect a DMM, set on ohms, between cavity H and
cavity S.
Repair open in CKT 9 (BRN) between headlamp and panel
switch and S210. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Go to Exterior
4 Systems. — —
Lights
Repair open in CKT 240 (ORN) between headlamp and
panel switch and The l/P fuse block. Refer to Wiring Go to Exterior
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. ' —■ ■ —
Lights
6 Is the repair complete? — ■■ Lights —
System Check
Stop Lamps Always On (Pickup)

Step Action ; Vaiue(s) Yes . No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic is only to be performed when the rear stoplamps remain illuminated at all times.
Was the Exterior Lights System Check performed? Go to Exterior
1 — Lights
Remove the Brake Lamp Relay.
2
Do the brake lights go out? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 8
Measure voltage at D& of the Brake Lamp Relay
3 Connector. V
Was voltage present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Disconnnect the Stoplamp, TCC, and Cruise Control
Switch Connector.
4 V
Is voltage still present at D7 of the Brake Lamp Relay
Connector? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Stop Lamps Always On (Pickup) (cont’d)
Replace the Brake Lamp Relay. Go to Exterior
5 Is the repair complete? Lights —
System Check
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 17 (WHT). Refer to Go to Exterior
6 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — Lights —
Replace the Stoplamp, TCC, and Cruise Control Switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 20 (LT BLU). Refer to Go to Exterior
8 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. '— .... Lights —
Stop Lamps Always On (Suburban/Utility)

Step Action | Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used when the rear stop lamps both stay illuminated at all times.
1 — Lights
Disconnect the Stop, TCC, and Cruise Control Switch.
2 — ... .
Do the lamps turn off? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Stop, TCC, and Cruise Control Switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
Disconnect the Directional Signal Switch.
4 —
Do the lamps turn off? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8
Measure voltage at pin A1 of the Directional Signal Switch.
5 —
Is voltage present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
Repair the short to voltage on CKT 17 (WHT). Refer to Go to Exterior
6 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — Lights . __ ..
Replace the Directional Signal Switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
Repair the short to voltage on CKT 18 (YEL) and CKT 19 Go to Exterior
8 (DK GRN). Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. ■ — Lights —
Stop Lamps Inoperative - All (Pickup)

Step Action Value(s) Yes : No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic should only be used if all brake lamps are inoperative.
1 Lights
Disconnect the Stop, TCC, and Cruise Switch. Measure
2 voltage at pin B of the connector. V
Was voltage present? Go to Step 4 Uo to Step 3
Repair open in Ckt 140 (ORN) Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to Exterior
3 Wiring Systems. — Lights —
Is repair complete? System Check
Depress the Brake pedal while measuring continuity from
4 pin A to pin B of the connector. a
is conitnuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Replace the Stop, TCC, and Cruise Switch. Refer to Go to Exterior
5 Stoplamp Switch Replacement in Hydraulic Brakes — Lights —
Stop Lamps Inoperative All (Pickup) (cont’d)
1. Reconnect the connector at the Stop, TCC, and
Cruise Switch.
6 2. Disconnect the connector at the Brake Lamp Relay. V
3. Measure voltage at D7 of the relay connector.
Is voltage present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Repair open in Ckt 17 (WHT). Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to Exterior
7 Wiring Systems. — Lights —
1. Reconnect the connector at the Brake Lamp Relay.

2. Disconnect the connector at the Directional Signal
Switch.
8 3. Apply the Brake Pedal. V
Measure voltage at pin E2 of the Directional Signal
Connector.
is voltage present? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Replace the Directional Signal Switch. Refer to Turn
Signal and Multifcn Switch Assembly - Disassemble - Off Go to Exterior
9 Vehicle (Column Shift) in Steering. — —
Lights
Inspect for an open in Ckt 20 (LT BLU). Refer to Wiring
10 Repairs in Wiring Systems —■
Was an open found? Go to Step 11 ' Go to Step 12
Repair the open in Ckt 20 (LT BLU). Refer to Wiring Go to Exterior
11 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — Lights —
Replace the Brake Lamp Relay. Go to Exterior
System Check
Stop Lamps Inoperative - All (Suburban/Utility)

Step Action Value(s) | Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic is only to be used when the rear stop lamps are all inoperative.
1 — Lights
Disconnect the Stoplamp, TCC, and Cruise Control Switch
2 Connector. Measure voltage at pin B. V
Was there voltage? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Repair the open in CKT 140 (ORN). Refer to Wiring Go to Exterior
3 Repairs in Wiring Systems. —' Lights '—
Depress the Brake pedal and measure continuity across
4 Pin A and Pin B. Q
Was there continuity? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Replace the Stoplamp, TCC, and Cruise Control Switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
1. Reconnect the Stoplamp, TCC, and Cruise Control
Switch Connector
2. Disconnect the Directional Signal Switch Connector.
6 V
3. Depress the Brake Pedal
Measure voltage at A1 of the connector
Was voltage present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Stop Lamps Inoperative - All (Suburban/Utility] i (cont’d)
step Action Value(s) Yes m
Repair the open in CKT 17 (WHT). Refer to Wiring Go to Exterior
7 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — Lights —
Replace the Directional Signal Switch. Go to Exterior
System Check
Stop Lamps Always On - Center High Mounted

1 — Lights
1. Disconnect the connector at the torque converter
clutch (TCC)/stoplamp switch.
2. Connect a J 34142-B between the TCC/stoplamp
2 switch connector, cavity F for CKT 17 (WHT), and —
ground.
1. Adjust the TCC/stoplamp switch.
Go to Exterior
3 2. Replace the TCC/stoplamp switch, as necessary. — Lights —
Repair the short to voltage in CKT 17 (WHT) between the Go to Exterior
4 TCC/stoplamp switch and the center high-mounted lamps. — Lights —
Stop Lamps Inoperative - Center High Mounted

1 — Lights
1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp.
2. Connect a J 34142-B between the center
high-mounted stoplamp, cavity A for CKT 17 (WHT),
2 —
and ground.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
1. Connect a J 34142-B between cavity A and cavity B.
3 2. Depress the brake pedal. —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between splice S421 Go to Exterior
4 and ground G400. — Lights —
Repair the open in CKT 17 (WHT) between splice S410 Go to Exterior
5 and splice S422. — Lights —
Replace the center high-mounted stoplamp. Go to Exterior
System Check
Spotlamp Inoperative
1 — L ig h ts
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B between cavity A at the inoperative
2 spotlamp and ground. —
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B between the body of the spotlamp
3 and B+. —
Repair the open in CKT 940 (BLK) between the spotlamp Go to E x te r io r
4 and the IP fuse block. — L ig h ts —
1. Inspect the spotlamp bulb and replace as necessary.
5 2. Replace the spotlamp assembly if the spotlamp bulb Go to E x te r io r : —
is OK. L ig h ts
Repair the ground between the spotlamp assembly and Go to E x te r io r
6 the body of the vehicle. — L ig h ts —
Turn Signal Lamps Inoperative - Left or Right Side

1 —■ L ig h ts
1. Turn the hazard flasher switch to the ON position.
2 2. Observe the lights on the malfunctioning side.
Do all the lights flash? Goto S t e p 3 Go to S t e p 4
1. Turn the hazard flasher switch to the OFF position.
3. Place the turn/hazard switch to the side that is not
3 operating. —
4. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from CKT 14 (LT BLU) or
CKT 15 (DK BLU) at connector C266 to ground.
Does the test lamp light? System OK Go to S t e p 6
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from CKT 14 (LT BLU) or CKT 15
(DK BLU) at the park/turn or marker lamp connector to
4 ground. —
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 - B from CKT 14 (LT BLU) or CKT 15
(DK BLU) to CKT 150 (BLK) or CKT 250 (BLK) at the
5 park/turn or marker lamp. —
Replace the turn/hazard switch. Go to E x te r io r
6 Is the repair complete? — L ig h ts —
Repair the open in CKT 14 (LT BLU) or CKT 15 (DK BLU)
between the affected park/turn or marker lamp and
7 connector C102, or between connector C102 and — Go to E x te r io r —
connector C266. L ig h ts
Turn Signal Lamps Inoperative - Left or Right Side (cont’d)
1. Inspect the condition of the bulb sockets.
Go to Exterior
8 2. Repair the bulb sockets, as necessary. — Lights . —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK), CKT 250 (BLK), or
CKT 9 (BRN) between the affected park/turn or marker Go to Exterior
9 lamp and ground G113 or ground G112. —
Lights
Turn Signal Indicators Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) | Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used to diagnose the turn signal indicators only if the turn signals
and the other l/P cluster indicators are operative.
Was the Exterior Lamp System Check performed? Go to Exterior
1 — Lights
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Connect a test lamp between cavity 3 or 32 and
ground.
2 3. Turn the ignition to the ON position. —
4. Place the turn signal switch to the LH or RH turn
positon.
Does the test lamp flash? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
1. Check the condition of the indicator bulb(s) and
replace as necessary.
3 2. If the indicator bulb(s) are good, replace the '— Go to Exterior —
instrument cluster. Lights
Repair open(s) in CKT(s) 14 (LT BLU) and/or 15 Go to Exterior
4 (DK BLU). Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. , — Lights . —
Repair Instructio ns
Headlamp Replacement
1 Removal Procedure
1. Make sure the headlamp switch in the OFF
position.
2. Remove the retaining ring screws (5) from the
retaining ring (4).
3. Remove the retaining ring from the headlamp (3).
4. Remove the headlamp from the headlamp
mounting bracket (2).
5. Disconnect the electrical connector (1) from the
headlamp.
Installation Procedure
1. Connect the electrical connector (1) to the
headlamp (3).
2. install the headlamp to the headlamp mounting
bracket (2).
3. Install the retaining ring (4) to the headlamp.
4. Install the retaining ring screws (5) to the
retaining ring.
277182
Headlamp Bulb Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF
position.
Caution: Halogen bulbs contain gas under
pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause
it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help
avoid personal injury:
• Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to
cool before changing the bulb. Leave the
lamp switch off until the bulb change is
complete.
• Always wear eye protection when changing a
halogen bulb.
• Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid
touching the glass.
• Do not drop or scratch the bulb.
• Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. zrme
• Place the used bulb in the new bulb’s carton
and dispose of it properly.
• Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of
children
Notice: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb
come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin
or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to
explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in
contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or
a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry.
2. Remove the bulbs from the headlamp capsules by
reaching from the engine compartment and by
twisting the bulb counterclockwise.
3. Remove the 2 long screws from the top of the
radiator support.
4. Pull forward the headlamp assembly (3).
5. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the
burned out bulb assembly (1).
277177
Important:
• Replace a high beam bulb with another high
beam bulb. The high beam bulb has a red gasket.
• Replace a low beam bulb with another low
beam bulb. The low beam bulb has a gray tip and
a yellow gasket at the base.
1. Install the new bulb assembly (1) into the
headlamp assembly (3).
Twist clockwise the bulb assembly.
2. Seat the bulb assembly with the connector
facing down.
3. Connect the electrical connector (2) to the bulb
assembly.
4. Install the headlamp assembly.
277177
5. Install the 2 long screws through the top of the

radiator support.
6. Tighten the screws.
277176
Headlamp Control Module Replacement

Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the control module from the retainer.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (3).
4. Remove the control module (2).
311560
1. Connect the electrical connectors (3).
2. Install the control module (2).
3. Install the control module to the retainer.
4. Install the negative battery cable.
311560
Headlam p Aim ing (Sealed Beam ) Correct the horizontal aiming and the vertical aiming
of each headlamp by adjusting the screws. The screws
T o o ls R e q u ir e d move the mounting bracket against the tension of
J 25300-A Headlamp Aimer the coil spring. The screws are in the headlamp bezel
area on the models with the sealed beam headlamp.
The screw (1) directly above the headlamp adjusts the
vertical position. The screw (2) to the side of the
headlamp adjusts the horizontal position.
Using the J 25300-A, adjust the headlamps to the
specifications required by the state and/or the
local authorities. Follow the instructions accompanying
the tool.
The screen method can also be used in adjusting the
headlamps. Refer to Healamp Aiming. Follow the
same directions. Observe the same tolerances for the
aim of the beam.
H eadlam p Aim ing (Composite)--..-. -
Composite Headlamps
Two adjusting screws control the horizontal and
vertical aiming of each headlamp assembly.
The screws (1, 2) are in the radiator support.
The location is not readily visible.
277178
The 2 holes in the radiator support for each headlamp

assembly provide access to the recessed adjusting
screws (1, 2). Using a T15 TORX® head bit, turn
the screws.
Adjust the headlamps to the specifications required by
/ |f w l y iiO
the state and/or the local authorities. J ' '
(5»] i#i " f #
IE i
1-------------- V© J
277180
Sealed Beam Headlamps

Correct the horizontal aiming and the vertical aiming
of each headlamp by adjusting the screws. The screws
move the mounting bracket against the tension of
the coil spring. The screws are in the headlamp bezel
area on the models with the sealed beam headlamp.
The screw (1) directly above the headlamp adjusts the
vertical position. The screw (2) to the side of the
headlamp adjusts the horizontal position.
200966
Visual Aiming Procedure
• All equipment for testing headlamps must comply
with the SAE Recommended Practice for
Headlamp Inspection Equipment.
• If you use a headlamp testing machine, the
machine should give results equivalent to
the results obtained using the screen procedure.
• The machine should be in good condition and be
properly adjusted.
Use the machine in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
• Machines that use a photoelectric cell or cells to
determine aim, should also include a visual
screen on which you can project a beam pattern
proportional to the beam appearance, and
aim on a screen at 7.62 m (25 ft).
- The screen should be plainly visible to the
technician who is adjusting the headlamps.
- The screen should have horizontal and
vertical reference lines in order to permit
visual evaluation of the headlamp beam.
Headlamp Aiming Location 8. Line up the centerline of the vehicle with the
(Using Screen Method) centerline of the aiming screen.
• The aiming area should be darkened and large • Mark the vertical center of the rear and front
enough to allow for the vehicle and an additional windows using tape.
7.62 m (25 ft), measured from the face of the • Use these lines as sights in order to line up
headlamps to the front of the screen. the centerline of the vehicle and the screen.
• The floor on which the vehicle rests must be 9. Adjust the vertical tapes on the screen in order to
parallel with the bottom of the screen. match the vertical centerline of each low beam
If the floor is not level, compensate accordingly. headlamp.
Measure the distance from the centerline of the
Headlamp Aiming Screen low beam lamp.
• If you use a screen, the screen should be at least 10. Adjust the horizontal tapes on the screen in order
1.52 m (5 ft) high x 3.66 m (12 ft) wide with a to match the horizontal centerline of each low
matte white finish, well shaded from beam headlamp.
extraneous light. Measure the height from the floor to the center of
• Properly adjust the screen to the floor on which the low beam.
the vehicle rests. 11. Turn on the low beam headlamps.
• The screen should be moveable so that you can 12. Observe the left and the top edges of the high
align the screen parallel to the rear axle of the intensity zone on the screen.
vehicle.
13. Adjust the headlamps to the following
• Position the screen so that a horizontal line drawn specifications:
perpendicular to the centerline of the screen will
• The top edge of the center of intensity on the
pass an equal distance midway between the
screen for the low beam should be less
two headlamps.
than 101.6 mm (4 in) above or below the cross
• The screen should have the following items: section of the headlamp centerlines.
- A vertical centerline (4) • The left edge of the center of intensity on the
- Two laterally adjustable vertical tapes (2) screen for the low beam should be less
- One vertically adjustable horizontal tape (3) than 101.6 mm (4 in) to the left or right of the
cross section of the headlamp centerlines.
• If a regular commercial aiming screen is
not available, the screen may consist of a wall Headlamp Aiming Alternative Procedure
having a clear, uninterrupted area at least T o o ls R e q u ir e d
1.83 m (6 ft) x 3.66 m (12 ft) wide. The surface
should be finished with a no-gloss white paint. J 25300-E Headlamp Aimer
• After the aiming screen has been set up 1. Prepare the vehicle.
and located, paint or tape a reference line (6) on 2. Make sure all of the components are in place, if
the floor 7.62 m (25 ft) from the screen. Park other work has been completed on the vehicle.
the vehicle with the front of the headlamps directly 3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
over this reference line. 4. Stop all of the other work on the vehicle.
Headlamp Aiming Procedure 5. Make sure the vehicle has one-half tank of fuel
or less.
1. Park the vehicle square with the screen, with the
headlamps directly over this reference line. 6. Close the doors.
2. Ensure that the components are in place if other 7. Rock sideways the vehicle.
work has been done on the vehicle. 8. Make sure the headlamps are not illuminated.
3. Ensure that the vehicle is on a level surface. 9. Using the J 25300-E, adjust the headlamps to the
specifications required by the state and/or local
4. Stop all other work on the vehicle. authorities.
5. Ensure that the vehicle has half a tank, or less, • Follow the instructions accompanying the tool
of fuel. for aiming the headlamps.
6. Close all of the doors. • The kit contains special adapters for use with
7. Rock the vehicle sideways. the composite headlamps.
Fog Lam p R eplacem ent - Front
Removal Procedure
Caution: Halogen bulbs contain gas under
pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause
it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help
avoid personal injury:
• Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to
cool before changing the bulb. Leave the
lamp switch off until the bulb change is
complete.
• Always wear eye protection when changing a
halogen bulb.
• Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid
touching the glass.
• Do not drop or scratch the bulb.
• Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb.
• Place the used bulb in the new bulb’s carton
and dispose of It properly.
• Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of
children
1. Remove the 2 screws from the front lamp
assembly.
2. Remove the lens from the front lamp assembly.
3. Twist the bulb to the left.
4. Remove the bulb.
1. Install the bulb into the lamp assembly.
2. Twist the bulb to the right.
3. Install the lens.
4. install the 2 screws.
Fog Lam p Bulb Replacem ent - Front

Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution In
2. Remove the bulb from the bottom of the fog lamp
assembly (4) by twisting counterclockwise and
pulling out.
311568
1. Install the bulb to the bottom of the fog lamp
assembly (4) by inserting the bulb and twisting
clockwise.
Fog Lam p A im ing Procedure

The fog lamps (6) are bracket-mounted to the
air dam (5) and to the bumper (1).
Prior to checking the aim of the fog lamps, prepare
the vehicle by completing the following steps:
1. Make sure that all of the components are in place,

if other work has been completed on the vehicle.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Stop all of the other work on the vehicle.
4. Make sure the vehicle has one-half tank of fuel
or less.
5. Close the doors.
6. Rock sideways the vehicle.
7. Make sure the vehicle has no load other than
the driver.
• Place a screen 760 mm (2.5 ft) in front of the
vehicle.
• Draw a horizontal line (1) at the same height
as the centerline of the lamps.
• Illuminate the fog lamps.
The top edge of the high intensity zone should be
5-20 mm (0.2-0.8 in) below the centerline of
the lamps.
• Vertically adjust the headlamps by turning the
adjusting screw above the lens on the fog
lamp assembly.
Horizontal adjustment of the lamps is not possible.
• You can adjustment the fog lamps using the
screen method. Refer to Headlamp Aiming.
In order to adjust the fog lamps using the screen
method, complete the following steps:
• Park the vehicle 7.62 m (25 ft) in front of the
screen.
• Using tape, make a horizontal line on the
screen at the same height as the centerline of
the lamps.
• Illuminate the fog lamps.
The top edge of the high intensity zone
should be 101.6 mm (4 in) below the
horizontal centerline of the fog lamps.
M arker Lam p Replacem ent -

Side (C om posite)
Removal Procedure
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the
OFF position.
2. Remove the grille. Refer to Grille Replacement in
Exterior Trim.
3. Remove the nuts.
4. Remove the sidemarker and/or the reflector lens.
5. Remove the bulb from the electrical connector.
277202
1. Install the bulb to the electrical connector.
2. Install the sidemarker and/or the reflector lens.
3. Install the nuts to the sidemarker.
4. Install the grille. Refer to Grille Replacement in
Exterior Trim.
277202
M arker Lam p R eplacem ent - S ide (Sealed)

Removal Procedure
position.
2. Remove the grille. Refer to Grille Replacement in
Exterior Trim.
3. Remove the nuts.
4. Remove the sidemarker and/or the reflector lens.
5. Remove the bulb from the electrical connector.
1. Install the bulb to the electrical connector.
2. Install the sidemarker and/or reflector lens.
3. Install the nuts to the sidemarker.
4. Install the grille. Refer to Grille Replacement in
Exterior Trim.
Park/Turn Signal Lam p R eplacem ent
(Com posite)
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the park/turn signal lamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove the bulbs from the assembly.
1. Install the bulbs to the park/turn signal lamp
assembly.
2. Install the lamp assembly.
3. Connect the park/turn signal lamp connector.
4. Install the screws.
Park/Turn Signal Lamp Replacem ent

(Sealed Beam )
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
3. Remove the park/turn signal lamp assembly.
5. Remove the bulbs from the assembly.
277198
1 Install the bulbs to the park/turn signal lamp
assembly.
2. Insert the tab into the grille.
3. Install the lamp assembly.
4. Connect the park/turn signal lamp connector.
Spotlam p Replacem ent

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable(s).
2. Remove the spotlamp wedge key screw.
3. Remove the handle from the outer tube shaft.
4. Remove the collar.
5. Remove the wire clip.
7. Remove the bracket set screw.
8. Pull the spotlamp and shaft out of the bracket.

9. Remove the spotlamp mounting bracket screws.
10. Remove the mounting bracket from the A pillar.
11. Remove the gasket from the A pillar.
277219
installation Procedure
1. Install the gasket to the A pillar.
2. Install the mounting bracket to the A pillar.
Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
3. Install the mounting bracket screws.
Tighten
Tighten the mounting bracket screws
to 15 N-m (11 Ib ft).
277219
4. Install the spotlamp and shaft through the A pillar

into the mounting bracket.
5. Rotate the spotlamp to the upright position.
Point the spotlamp forward.
8 . Install the bracket set screw. '
7. Tighten the set screw just enough in order to
firmly hold the spotlamp in the upright position.
8. Install the wire clip.
9. Install the collar.
10. Connect the electrical connector.
11. Install the handle onto the outer tube shaft.
12. Install the spotlamp wedge key screw.
13. Connect the negative battery cable(s).
Spotlam p Bulb Replacement

Removal Procedure
2. Remove the spotlamp bezel retaining screw.
3. Remove the spotlamp bulb and bezel from the
spotlamp housing.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Remove the spotlamp bulb from the bezel.
1. Install the spotlamp bulb into the bezel.
2. Connect the electrical connectors.
3. Install the spotlamp bulb and bezel into the
spotlamp housing.
4. Install the spotlamp bezel retaining screw.
Spotlam p Travel Adjustm ent

1. Loosen the bracket set screw.
2. Grasp the spotlamp.
Slowly rotate the spotlamp inboard to the point
where the shaft contacts the parkstop.
3. Slowly rotate the spotlamp outboard to a
position 5 degrees past vertical in order to
accomplish the following results:
• The backstop is in motion.
• The outer tube shaft rotates.
4. Tighten the bracket set screw enough in order to
prevent the shaft tube from rotating while the
stoplamp moves between stop positions.
5. Rotate the spotlamp head inboard in order to
position the parkstop.
This prevents the stoplamp from making contact
with the body components.
6. Position the parkstop of the shaft in order to
accomplish the following results:
• Rotation of the spotlamp on the axis
• Clearance of the spotlamp from the
nearest body components by 0.5-13.0 mm
(0.02-0.50 in)
7. Tighten the bracket set screw in order to prevent
rotation of the spotlamp shaft.
Notices.
8. Adjust the spotlamp head clamping screw in order
to accomplish the following results:
• The spotlamp rotates easily on the shaft.
• The spotlamp head clamping screw holds the
spotlamp in any adjusted position between
the parkstop and the backstop.
• The total range of motion of the spotlamp head
is approximately 90 degrees.
Tighten
Tighten the head clamping screw to
3 N-m (27 Ib in).
M arker Lamp Replacem ent - Roof

Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the lens screws (1).
3. Remove the lens (2).
4. Remove the insulator (3).
5. Remove the bulb (7).
277236
1. Install the bulb (7).
2. Install the insulator (3).
3. Install the lens (2).
4. Install the lens screws (1).
Clearance Lam p Replacem ent

Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the lamp assembly screws (4).
3. Remove the lamp assembly (3) from the fender.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and bulb (5)
from the lamp.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
1. Install the bulb (5) to the socket.
2. Connect the electrical connector and bulb to
the lamp (3).
3. Install the lamp assembly to the fender.
4. Install the lamp assembly screws (4).
Headlamp Switch Replacement
Removal Procedure
C a u tio n ; R e fe r to B a tte ry D is c o n n e c t C a u tio n in
C a u tio n s a n d N o tic e s .
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to IP
Cluster Replacement in Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Console.
4. Unsnap the switch.
Remove the switch.
1. Install the headlamp switch and/or the panel
dimmer switch to the bezel.
3. Install the bezel to the instrument panel. Refer to
IP Cluster Replacement in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console.
4. Connect the negative battery cable.
Fog Lam p Switch Replacem ent - Front

Removal Procedure
Caution; Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
2. Remove the IP cluster trim bezel. Refer to Bezel
Replacement - IP Cluster.
3. Remove the fog lamp switch connector.
318954
4. Remove the fog lamp switch from the bezel by
pressing in on the two tabs on each side of the
switch behind the bezel.
s^ i H
O pr
288168
1. Install the fog lamp switch to the bezel.
2. Install the fog lamp switch connector.
Qnr~
288168
3. Install the IP cluster trim bezel. Refer to Bezel

Replacement - IP Cluster in IP Gauges, and
Console.
DRL Control M odule Replacem ent
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the relay from the convenience center.
1. Install the relay to the convenience center.
277251
DRL Relay Replacem ent

Removal Procedure
Important: The daytime running lamps (DRL) module
consists of a circuit board in a black aluminum
case with fins. The module attaches to the instrument
panel (IP) harness behind the left side of the IP.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
position.
3. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to Knee Bolster
Replacement in IP, Gauges and Console.
4. Remove the DRL module from the bracket.
6. Remove the module from the vehicle.
277249
1. Install the module to the vehicle.
3. Install the knee bolster. Refer to Knee Bolster
277249
Em ergency Roof Lam p Switch

R eplacem ent
Removal Procedure
277261
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4).

4. Remove the retainer (3) from the rear of the
faceplate.
5. Remove the switch from the faceplate.
Installation Procedure .
1. Install the switch to the faceplate.
2. Install the retainer (3).
2.1. Align the indexing tab on the nut to the tab
on the switch (1).
2.2. Slide the nut to the faceplate until the nut
snaps into position.
3. Connect the electrical connector (4).
277262

Console Lamp Replacement

Removal Procedure
2. Remove the lamp assembly by completing the
following steps:
2.1. Push upward against the reading lamp
assembly.
2.2. Turn the reading lamp assembly
counterclockwise.
2.3. Lower the assembly from the console.
3. Remove the bulb and base assembly from the
back of the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the base by pulling the
bulb straight out of the base.
277266
1. Install the bulb into the base by pushing the bulb
straight into the base,
2. Install the bulb and base assembly into the lens
and socket assembly.
3. Install the lamp assembly into the console by
pushing the lamp assembly into the console.
4. Turn the lamp assembly clockwise.
Courtesy Lam p/R eflector

R eplacem ent - Door
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel
Replacement - Side Rear Door,
2. Disconnect the wiring connector to the
courtesy lamp.
3. Carefully release the lamp assembly retainers
with a flat-blade tool.
Remove the lamp from the trim panel.
1. Snap the lamp assembly into the trim panel.
2. Connect the wiring connector.
3. Install the trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel
Replacement - Side Rear Door.
IP Compartment Lamp Replacement
Removal Procedure
position.
2. Remove the instrument panel storage
compartment.
3. Depress the switch plunger.
4. Pull the switch assembly downward from the
retainer.
6. Remove the shield from the switch assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the switch assembly.
277264
1. Install the bulb into the socket.
2. Install the shield to the switch assembly.
4. Depress the switch plunger,
5. Slide the assembly upward into the retainer.
6. Install the instrument panel storage compartment.
Ashtray Lamp Replacement

Removal Procedure
position.
3. Squeeze the sides of the instrument panel
storage compartment.
4. Pull out the compartment.
5. Remove the ashtray assembly by unsnapping the
retainers.
6. Remove the lamp assembly and shield from the
top of the ashtray bracket.
7. Remove the shield from the lamp assembly.
8. Remove the bulb from the base by pulling the bulb
straight out of the base.
277243
1. Install the bulb into the base by pushing the bulb
straight into the base.
2. Install the shield to the lamp assembly.
3. Install the lamp assembly and the shield to the
top of the ashtray bracket.
4. Install the ashtray assembly to the
instrument panel.
5. Install the instrument panel storage compartment.
Vanity M irror Lam p R eplacem ent

Removal Procedure
The vanity mirror is an integral part of the sunshade. If
the vanity mirror is damaged, replace the sunshade
assembly. Replace separately only the bulbs.
1. Lift the cover on the vanity mirror.
2. Pry out the lamp lens.
3. Gently pry out the lamp bulb.
1. Press in the lamp bulb.
2. Snap in the lamp lens.
277269
Trans Fir Shift Control Indicator Lam p
Replacem ent
Removal Procedure
position.
2. Unscrew the shift lever knob.
Remove the shift lever knob.
3. Remove the 4 bezel screws.
4. Remove the transfer case bezel.
5. Pull the bulbs straight out of the sockets.
1. Push the bulbs straight into the sockets.
2. Install the bulbs and sockets into the back of
the bezel.
3. Install the bezel to the floor with the 4 screws.
4. Install the shift lever knob.
Dom e Lam p Replacem ent

(All M odels Except Suburban)
Removal Procedure
4. Remove the housing screws (6).
5. Remove the lamp assembly (4).
6. Disconnect the electrical connector (1).
7. Remove the bezel (3).
277252
1. Install the bezel (3).
2. Connect the electrical connector (1).
3. Install the lamp assembly (4).
4. Install the housing screws (6).
277252
Dome Lam p R eplacem ent (Suburban)

Removal Procedure
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
4. Remove the housing screws.
5. Remove the housing assembly.
7. Remove the bezel.
277253
1. Install the bezel.
3. Install the housing assembly.
4. Install the housing screws.
5. Install the bulb.
Door Jamb Switch Replacement (Door)
Removal Procedure
2. Locate the door jamb switch.
The switch is under the left side of the
instrument panel.
3. Squeeze together the tangs of the switch.
4. Push the switch through the side of the
instrument panel.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector of the door
jamb switch.
6. Remove the door jamb switch.
1. Connect the electrical connector of the door
jamb switch.
2. Squeeze together the tangs of the switch.
3. Push the switch through the side of the
instrument panel.
277254
Door Jam b Switch R eplacem ent (Liftgate)

Removal Procedure
2. Unthread the switch from the vehicle.
Remove the switch.
2. Install the switch to the vehicle.
277256
License Lam p Replacem ent

(W /Step Bum per)
Removal Procedure
position.
2. Remove the lens (3) from the lamp assembly.
277223
2. Install the lens (3) to the lamp assembly.
3. Install the wiring (4) to the back of the lens
assembly.
277223
License Lamp Replacement
(W /O Step Bum per)
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the lens from the lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb.
277225
2. Install the lens to the lamp assembly.
3. Install the wiring to the back of the lens assembly.
277225
(P ickup w /Platform Hitch)
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
3. Remove the bulb.
assembly.
277227

(C ah/C hassis w /Platform Hitch)
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
3. Remove the bulb.
277229
3. Install the wiring to the back of the lens assembly.
277229

(Pickup w/o Bum per)
Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the lens from the lamp assembly (2).
3. Remove the bulb.
2. Install the lens to the lamp assembly (2).
assembly.
277232
Tail/Turn Signal Lam p R eplacem ent
(C ab/C hassis)
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the lamp electrical connector from the
lamp assembly.
2. Remove the nuts from the back of the bracket.
3. Remove the lamp assembly from the bracket.
4. Remove the 4 lens screws.
5. Remove the lens.
6. Remove the gasket.
7. Remove the bulb.
1. Install the lamp assembly to the bracket.
2. Install the nuts.
3. Connect the electrical connector to the lamp
assembly.
5. Install the gasket.
7. Install the 4 screws.
277239
Tail/Turn Signal Lam p Replacem ent

(Pickup, Suburban, Utility)
Removal Procedure
position.
2. Lower the endgate.
3. Remove the 2 screws retaining the tail/turn signal
lamp assembly to the body.
4. Rotate the tail/turn signal lamp assembly from the
vehicle.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
assembly.
277240
6. Identify the bulb in need of replacement.
• The top bulb is a parking lamp.
• The center bulb is a parking, brake, and turn
indicator lamp.
• The lower bulb is a backup lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out by the tabs on the base
of the bulb in order to remove the bulb.
1. Push the bulb straight into the lamp assembly in
order to install the bulb.
2. Install the lamp base to the lens assembly with
the 2 screws.
4. Install the tail/turn signal lamp assembly to the
vehicle with the 2 screws.
Side Marker Lamp Replacement

Removal Procedure
position.
3. Remove the lamp assembly (3) from the fender.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and bulb (5)
from the lamp.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
277233
1. Install the bulb (5) to the socket.
2. Connect the electrical connector and bulb to
the lamp (3).
3. Install the lamp assembly to the fender.
Cargo Lam p R eplacem ent

Removal Procedure
OFF position.
2. Remove the lens screws (1).
6. Remove the lamp assembly (3) from the roof.
7. Disconnect the wiring harness (5) from the lamp
assembly.
8. Remove the gasket (7) from the roof.
1. Install the gasket (3) to the roof.
2. Connect the wiring harness (5) to the lamp
assembly (3).
3. Install the lamp assembly to the roof.
Notices.
7. Install the cargo lamp retaining screws (1).
Tighten
Tighten the cargo lamp retaining screws to
2.0 N-m (171b in).
277171
Cargo Lam p Sw itch R eplacem ent (Fog)
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to IP
Cluster Replacement in Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Console.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors
4. Squeeze the tangs together at the side of the
switch in order to remove the switch.
277247
1. Squeeze together the tangs at the sides of the
switch.
2. Press the switch into the front of the bezel.
IP Cluster Replacement in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console.
277247
Cargo Lam p Sw itch Replacem ent

(C argo/D om e)
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to
Bezel Replacement - IP Cluster in IP Gauges,
and Console.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors
4. Squeeze the tangs together at the side of the
switch in order to remove the switch from
the bezel.
277246
1. Squeeze together the tangs at the sides of the
switch.
2. Press the switch into the front of the bezel.
Bezel Replacement - IP Cluster in IP Gauges,
and Console.
Endgate Lam p R eplacem ent

Removal Procedure
Replace the lens, the lamp, and the base as one
assembly.
position.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the 2 screws.
4. Remove the lamp assembly.
2. Install the lamp assembly to the endgate.
3. Install the 2 screws.
Description and Operation
DRL Circuit Description With the headlamp and panel dimmer switch in the
PARK position or the HEAD position (if the switch is in
Voltage is available to the headlamp and panel
the HEAD position, the headlamp dimmer switch
dimmer switch at all times. The headlamp and panel
must be in the LOW position), voltage is available
dimmer switch includes a self-resetting circuit breaker.
through the closed contacts of the park lamp switch to
The circuit breaker opens when the headlamp and
the fog lamp switch. With the fog lamp switch in the
panel dimmer switch draws too much current. When
ON position, voltage is available through the
the circuit breaker opens, the circuit breaker interrupts
closed contacts of the fog lamp switch to the coil
the current flow. Without the current flow, the circuit
(power side) of the fog lamp relay. Voltage is available
breaker cools and resets automatically.
to the contact side of the relay through the
When the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in the DRL-FOG fuse 15.
HEAD position, the headlamp and panel dimmer
Ground is available from the daytime running lamps
switch directs voltage to either the low beam
(DRL) module to the coil (ground side) of the fog lamp
headlamps or the high beam headlamps. This depends
relay, provided that the headlamp dimmer switch is
on the headlamp and panel dimmer switch position.
in the LOW position, if the headlamp and panel dimmer
When the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in the
switch is in the ON position.
HEAD position, not only is voltage available for the
headlamps, but the daytime running lamps (DRL) With both power and ground available to the coil of
module receives a HEADLAMPS ON signal. When the the fog lamp relay, the relay energizes. Then, voltage
DRL module receives this signal, the module is available through the closed contacts of the relay
disables the DRL operation, if the ignition switch is in to the fog lamp ON indicator, the left fog lamp, and the
the RUN position, the BULB j e s t position, or the right fog lamp.
START position. The indicator lamp and the fog lamps light. If the
When the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in the selection of the headlamp dimmer switch changes to
HEAD position and the headlamp and panel dimmer the HIGH position when the headlamp and panel
switch is in the LOW position, voltage is available dimmer switch is in the HEAD position and the fog .
through the closed contacts of the headlamp and panel lamp switch is in the ON position, then the DRL
dimmer switch to the left low beam headlamp and module receives a high beam headlamp operation
the right low beam headlamp. Ground G112 supplies signal. Then the DRL module disables the fog
ground to the right low beam headlamp Ground G113 lamp relay. This extinguishes the fog lamps.
supplies ground to the left low beam headlamp in
vehicles with the base headlamps and in vehicles with Exterior Lights Circuit Description
the quad headlamps. With both power and ground
applied, the low beam headlamps light. Park, Turn, and License Lamps
When the headlamp dimmer switch is moved to the Voltage is available through the PARK LP fuse to the
HIGH position and the headlamp and panel dimmer headlamp and panel dimmer switch at all times,
switch is in the HEAD position, voltage is available when the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in the
through the closed contacts of the headlamp and panel PARK position or in the HEAD position, voltage is
dimmer switch, and the headlamp and panel dimmer available to the following components:
switch to the DRL module, the left high beam • The tail/stop-turn lamps
headlamp, and the right high beam headlamp. With • The marker lamps
the headlamp dimmer switch in the HIGH position,
voltage is available to the high beam indicator. With • The endgate clearance lamps
ground G103 in vehicles with gasoline engines, or • The park/turn lamps
ground G104 in vehicles with diesel engines, supplying • The license lamps
a ground to the high beam indicator, the indicator
lights. Ground G112 supplies a ground for the Stoplamps
right high beam headlamp. Ground G113 supplies a Voltage is available at all times through the STOP/HAZ
ground to the left high beam headlamp. With both fuse to the torque converter clutch (TCC)/stoplamp
power and ground applied, the high beam headlamps : switch. With the depression of the brake pedal,
light at full intensity. the contacts in the TCC/stoplamp switch close. Voltage
is available from the stoplamp relay on pickups, or
Fog Lights Circuit Description the TCC/stoplamp switch on all of the other vehicles,
through the turn/hazard switch to the left stoplamp,
Fog lamp operation is possible with the headlamp and the right stoplamp, and the stoplamp lights. If a
panel dimmer switch in the PARK position or in the turn signal is in operation, the stoplamp on that side
HEAD position. However, if the headlamp and flashes as a turn signal. The other stoplamp serves as
panel dimmer switch is in the HEAD position, the fog a stoplamp.
lamps are only operational if the headlamp dimmer
switch is in the LOW position.
Turn Signal Lamps The front marker lamps flash in the HAZARD FLASH
With the ignition switch in the RUN position or the position in the same manner these lamps flash in
START position, voltage is available through the the TURN RIGHT position and the TURN LEFT
TURN-B/U fuse and through the turn/hazard flasher to position. If the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is
the normally-closed contact of the hazard flasher in the OFF position, the front marker lamps flash
switch in the turn/hazard switch. when the hazard lamps are in operation. If the
headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in either the
With the turn signal switch in the left turn position, PARK position or the HEAD position, the front marker
voltage is available to both the left turn indicator and lamps flash ON when the hazard lamps are not in
to CKT 14 (LT BLU) of the left park/turn lamp. operation; and the front marker lamps flash OFF when
Voltage is available to CKT 18 (YEL) of the left rear the hazard lamps are in operation.
turn lamp.
In the HAZARD position, the circuit is always open,
The lamps illuminate immediately. The lamps begin and the turn/hazard flasher controls the lamps.
flashing when the current flow heats the timing element
in the flasher. The timing element repeatedly opens Cargo Lamp
and closes the circuit. Voltage is available at all times through the
The voltage to the left front park/turn lamp is also CTSY fuse 3 to the cargo lamp switch. When the
available to the left front marker lamp. If the headlamp cargo lamp switch is in the ON position, voltage flows
and panel dimmer switch is in the OFF position, the through the switch to the lamp. Ground is available
left front marker lamp finds a path to ground through at the following components:
splice S122 and through the many lamps connected in • The courtesy lamp switch, part of the headlamp
parallel to ground. These lamps provide low and panel dimmer switch
resistance paths to ground. The marker lamp flashes
• The illuminated entry module
with the turn lamps. The lamps used for the ground
path do not flash, however, because the voltage drop • The remote keyless entry module through the
across the marker lamp is much higher than across power door jamb switch(es)
the other lamps. Spot Lamp (Z56)
When the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in If the vehicle has either option 7X6 or 7X7 as part of
either PARK or HEAD, voltage is available through the the police package Z56, one or 2 spot lamps are
PARK LP fuse, the headlamp and panel dimmer
on the A pillar. Voltage is available at all times from
switch, and splice S122 to the marker lamps and the fuse BLANC through CKT 940 (BLK) to the spot lamps.
park lamps. If the turn/hazard switch is in the The spot lamps are permanently case-grounded.
TURN LEFT position, the left front marker lamp has When the spot lamp thumb switch located on
voltage at both connections and the lamp extinguishes. the inside end of the spotlamp assembly moves, the
When the flasher removes voltage to the turnlamp,
circuit completes.
the marker lamp grounds through the turnlamp and the
marker lamp illuminates. In this manner, the left Roof Wiring (Z56)
front marker lamp flashes when the left front park/turn If the vehicle is equipped with option 6F5 as part of
lamp extinguishes. the police package Z56, an extra wiring harness
With the turn/hazard switch in the TURN RIGHT is available for any roof-mounted aftermarket
position, voltage is available to the right lamps in the accessories. The harness begins under the right side
same manner. of the instrument panel in a coil on the floor. The
harness route then proceeds under the right front door
Hazard
sill plate, up the right B pillar, and across the roof
Voltage is available at all times through the bow. The harness loops 81.3 cm (32 in) to the rear of
STOP/HAZ fuse and the turn/hazard flasher to the the windshield centerline.
normally open contact of the hazard flasher switch in
the turn/hazard switch. With the hazard switch in Grille (Z56)
the HAZARD FLASH position, voltage is available to As part of the police package Z56, an extra wiring
both the front turn lamps and the rear turn lamps. All of harness and a relay are available for any aftermarket
the turn lamps and the turn indicators flash on accessories, which would include grille lights and
and off. a grille speaker. The harness starts under the right
side of the instrument panel in a coil on the floor. The
harness route then proceeds through a grommet in
the bulkhead and down the right side of the engine
compartment. The harness then loops behind the right
side of the grille.
Backup Lights Circuit Description Power is also available for controlled dimming through
the rheostat to the ILLUM fuse #14 through
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position,
CKT 44 (DK GRN) when in one of the lighting
voltage is available through the TURN B/U fuse to the
functions. From the ILLUM fuse power is sent through
backup lamp switch. With the transaxle in reverse,
CKT 8 (GRY) to the following components:
voltage is available to the left and right backup lamps,
which are permanently grounded. When voltage is • Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch.
available to CKT 24 (LT GRN), the backup lamps • Liftgate Release Switch
illuminate. CKT 24 (LT GRN) also supplies input to the • Radio
electrochromatic rearview mirror dimming function.
Connection is also available for the trailer-tow • Window Wiper/Washer Switch, Rear
capability. • Automatic Transfer Case Controls
• Automatic Transfer Case Select Switch
Interior Lights Circuit Description • Fog Lamp Switch
Voltage is available at all times from the CTSY fuse 3 Ground for the above components is G200,
to the courtesy lamps, the dome and reading lamps, through CKT 150 (BLK).
and the instrument panel (IP) compartment box lamp. • Front and Rear, Auxiliary HVAC Control
The courtesy lamps and the dome and reading Switch Lamps
lamps illuminate when the headlamps and panel
• Rear AC Selector Switch
dimmer switch or one of the door jamb switches
provides a ground path. Ground for the HVAC Controls is G400, through
The IP compartment box lamp and the vanity lamps CKT 150 (BLK)
have switches that provide ground paths when the • Instrument Cluster
switches close. Ground for the Instrument Cluster runs through
CKT 451 (BLK/WHT) to both ground
interior Lights Dim m ing Circuit G103 and G104.
Description
The Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch is the
Special Tools and Equipment
controlling component for the interior dimming function. Illustration Tool Number/ Description
This switch uses an internal rheostat to allow the
customer to set the dimming to a desired setting.
Power is available to the Headlamp and Panel Dimmer
Switch at all times from the PK LMPS fuse #9
through CKT 240 (ORN). Once the switch is turned to
either the Park Lamp or Headlamp function, parade
dimming is capable through CKT 1382 (PPL/WHT) to
the illumination lamps of the following components:
• Transfer Case Switch Transfer Case Controls.
T
• Radio J 25300-B
• Instrument Cluster Headlight Aimer
( M
202825
W ip e r s/W a sh e r Systems
Specifications
Specification
Application Metric English
Washer Solvent Container Bolts 6 N*m 53 Ib ip
Wiper Module Cover Screws 2.6 N-m 23 Ib
Transmission Assembly Drive Link Nuts 5 N-m 44 Ib in
Transmission to Cowl Bolts 7 N-m 62 Ib in
Wiper Motor to Cowl Bolts 7 N-m 62 Ib in
Wiper Motor Shaft Nut — Rear 6 N-m 53 Ib in
Wiper Motor Bolt — Rear 6 N-m 53 Ib in

Wiper/Washer System Schematic References
Reference on Schematic Section Number - Subsection Name
Ground Distribution-Cell 14 8-Wiring Systems
Power Distribution-Cell 10 8-Wiring Systems
Wiper/Washer System Schematic Icons

icon icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice in Cautions and Notices.
19384
8-188
f Hot In ACCY And RUN
Power --- 1'p
W ipers/Washer System s_______________________________________________________________________

1 Distribution
I Cell 10 ** K8 t , WIPER | o lJSe,
1 Fuse 11 Block
1
1 YEL 143
E4 C266
Whiper Control
Windshield
Wiper/Washer
Switch
High A
C102 lu A
— »>—
0.8 RED 226
“K < /A s r
# Delay 2
Instant Wipe
Delay 1
C. C116
0.8 BLU 150
Wash 0.8 RED 228 0.8 RED/BLK 226
£P101
B A
’■^AAAT Off
Front
-W W Windshield
^AAAT™" Washer
Pump
E6; C266 E3 C266 Motor
1 BRN 96 1 PPL 92
SP100
1 YEL 143 1 BRN 96 S158 <
C
0.8 BLU 150
43 Low Windshield Suburban/
Wiper A 0.8 BLU 150 Utility Only
Motor A
Solid Module S im B. C116
State
Logic
0.8 BLK 150
B 1 BLK 150
Ground
9P100 Distribution 1S123 Rear
CsiUi__ Windshield
■ ------------ - -OS204 Washer
A Pump
Ground
3 BLK 150 2 BLK 160 Motor
Cell 92
Distribution - - - - - - 4 G200
jam:.. 40113
492418
Body and A ccesso ries___________________________________________________________________________
Component Locator
Wiper/Washer System Components
Under the left side of the IP, on the
Convenience Center bulkhead
To the left of the IP, near the left front
IP Fuse Block door jamb switch
Window Washer Pump In the washer reservoir, right front of the W iperA A /asher S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Motor, Rear vehicle, behind the support C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Window Wiper Motor W ip e r/W a s h e r S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
On the lower liftgate glass
Module, Rear C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Windshield Washer At the washer reservoir, left rear of the W iperA A /asher S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Pump Motor, Front radiator support bracket C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Window Wiper/Washer W iperA A /asher S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Center of the IP, right of the radio
Switch, Rear C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V iew s
Windshield Wiper At the center and rear of the engine W ip e r/W a s h e r S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Motor Module compartment, at the bulkhead C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Windshield At the steering column, part of the W ip e r/W a s h e r S yste m W ip e r/W a s h e r S y s te m
Wiper/Washer Switch multifunction lever C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Part of the forward lamps harness to IP
In lin e H a rn e s s C o n n e c to r
harness, in the left rear side of the engine H a rn e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C102 compartment, near the underhood in Wiring Systems
E n d V ie w s in Wiring
Systems
fuse-relay center, mounted on the fender
In the left rear of the vehicie, near the core H a rn e s s R o u tin g V iew s
C116 support in Wiring Systems
E n d V iew s in Wiring
Systems
H a rn e s s R o u tin g V iew s
C221 At the convenience center
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Part of the IP harness to steering column In lin e H a rn e s s C o n n e c to r
C266 harness, to the left side of the steering
in Wiring Systems
column, near the bulkhead Systems
C402 At the top, center rear of the vehicle E n d V iew s in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
Behind the left side of the IP, Below the
G200 fuse block, on the tie bar
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in —
Wiring Systems
On the radiator support, near the left side
G113 C o m p o n e n t V iew s in —
headlamp
Wiring Systems
G400 On the right side B pillar, near the
(Utility/Suburban) door striker
Wiring Systems
In the left rear side of the engine
P100 compartment, at the bulkhead,
in Wiring Systems
—
above C100
In the right rear side of the engine H a rn e s s R o u tin g V iew s
P101 compartment, at the bulkhead in Wiring Systems —

S123 (9 in) from LH park lamp breakout, toward —
windshield washer pump
S158 In washer pump jumper harness — —
Wiper/Washer System Components (cont’d)
S204 — —
C100, towards Data Link Connector (DLC)
IP harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from DLC
S219 — —
breakout
(14.5 in) from RR door jamb switch
S410 (2-door Utility) — —
breakout, toward RH door speaker
breakout
S410 (4-Door
(4.5 in) from RR door speaker breakout, — —
Utility/Suburban)
toward RR door jamb breakout
W iper/W asher System C om ponent View s

Steering Column Switches
314701
Legend
(1) Steering Wheel (4) Windshield Washer Switch
(2) Steering Column (5) Cruise Control Switch
(3) Windshield Wiper Switch (6) Hazard Warning Switch
465195
Legend
(1) Forward Lamp Harness (5) Windshield Washer Motor, Rear
(2) C116 (6) Windshield Washer Reservoir
(3) Windshield Washer Motor Wiring Harness (7) Battery, LH (Auxiliary/Diesel Only)
(4) Windshield Washer Motor, Front
Horn, Wiper Motor Module, Park/Turn and Fog Headlamp
278089
Legend
(1) Left Front Headlamp Connectors (4) Left Horn
(Composite) (5) Windshield Wiper Motor Module
(2) Left Front Park and Turn Lamp
(3) Left Fog Lamp Connector
Inflatable Restraint IP Module Switch
Legend
(1) Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (5) Inflatable Restraint IP Module Switch
(2 ) Liftgate Release Switch (Pickup) / Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
(3) Ashtray Lamp Radio Override Switch (Z56) / Auxiliary
Cigar Lighter Heater Fan Switch
(4)
Rear Wiper/Washer Motor Module
277992
(1) Rear Window Wiper Motor Module (2) Rear Window Washer Hose
Visual Identification
W iper/W asher System Connector Windshield Wiper Motor Module, Front
End Views
Windshield Washer Pump Motor, Front
...... \
ic jj [A |
m
m ] [DJ
... J
68703
Connector Part • 12124634 =
Information .• 5F M /P 280 Series (BLK)
Circuit
Connector Part • 12052641 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Information • 2F M /P 150 Series (BLK) Windshield Washer
A. RED 228
Circuit Pump Motor - Feed
Pin Wire Color No. Function B BLK 150 Ground
Windshield Washer
RED 228 Fuse Output -
Pump Motor Feed C YEL 143 Accessory -
BLK 150 Ground Type III Fuse
Windshield Wiper Motor
D PPL 92
Feed - High Speed
Windshield Wiper
E BRN 96 Switch Signal -
Pulse Delay
Window Washer Pump Motor, Rear

Information • 2F M /P 280 Series (BLK)
Circuit
Rear Window Washer
DKGRN 392
Pump Motor - Feed
BLK 150 Ground
Window Wiper Motor Module, Rear Window Wiper/ Washer Switch, Rear
( L A J M C J i m
I J
E
c£bc£c£b c&
E §
62450
Connector Part • 12052856 Connector Part • 12064998

Information • 4F M /P 280 Series (BLK) Information • 8F M/P 150 Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin . Wire Color No* . Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
A BLK : 150 Ground Rear Window Wiper
A WHT 393 Motor - Feed
Rear Window Wiper
B ■ GRA 391 Switch Output Rear Window Washer
B DKGRN 392 Pump Motor - Feed
Rear Window Washer
C DKGRN 392 Pump Motor - Feed C — — Not Used
Windshield Wiper Rear Window Wiper
D LT BLU 97 D GRA 391
Switch MIST/OFF/LOW Switch Output
Instrument Panel
E ; GRA 8 . Lamp Feed
Windshield Wiper
F ' LT BLU : 97 " Switch Signal
MIST/OFF/LOW
G — — Not Used
H BLK 150 Ground
Diagnostic Information and Procedures
Wiper/Washer System Check
IMPORTANT: When performing the following checks, maintain some moisture on the front windshield so that the wiper motor
does not overheat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the • Wipers operate at low speed. Refer to W a sh e rs Inoperative.
ON position. • Washer sprays windshield as
2. Leave the Wiper Switch in the long as washer switch is held in
1 OFF position. the ON position.
3. Depress the washer switch for • After releasing switch, washer
2 to 4 seconds and release. stops and wipers return to park
position after 2 to 4 sweeps.
1. Move the wiper switch to the • Wipers make one complete Refer to W ip e rs D e la y M o d e
INT position. sweep, then pause before In o p e ra tiv e (Front).
2. Rotate the INT ADJ switch from making next sweep.

2
the high to low delay position. • The pause time is adjusted by
turning the INT ADJ switch
through the delay range.
1. Leave the wiper switch in the • Washer sprays windshield as • Refer to W a sh e rs In o p e ra tive .
1NT position. long as washer switch is held in • Refer to W ip e rs D e la y M o d e
2. Depress the washer switch for the ON position. In o p e ra tiv e (Front).
2 to 4 seconds and release. • Wipers run at low speed while
3 spraying and continue for 2 to 4
sweeps after washer switch is
released.
• Wipers then return to pulse
operation.
Move the wiper switch to the LO Wipers run continuously at Refer to W ip e rs A ll M o d e s
4 position. low speed. In o p e ra tiv e
Move the wiper switch to the HI Wipers run continuously at • Refer to W ip e rs A ll M o d e s
position. high speed. In o p e ra tive .
5
• Refer to W ip e rs H ig h M o d e
In o p e ra tive , L o w M o d e O p e ra te s
Move the wiper switch to the OFF Wipers return to the park position at Refer to W ip e rs A lw a y s On.
6
position. low speed.
Move the wiper switch to the MIST Wipers make one complete sweep, • Refer to W ip e rs A lw a y s On.
7 position and then release. then return to the park position.
• Refer to W ip e rs A ll M o d e s
In o p e ra tiv e
Wiper/Washer Rear System Check

Place the rear wiper/washer switch Wiper makes one complete sweep Refer to W ip e rs D e la y M o d e
1 in the DELAY position. and pauses before making the In o p e ra tiv e (R e a r)
next sweep
Place the rear wiper/washer switch The rear wiper operates in full Refer to W ip e rs In o p e ra tiv e - R e a r
2 in the ON position. continuous sweeps.
Depress the rear washer switch for The rear washer sprays as long as Refer to W a sh e rs In o p e ra tiv e - R e a r
3
2 to 4 seconds and release. the rear washer switch is depressed.
Place the rear wiper/washer switch The rear wiper returns to the PARK Refer to W ip e rs A lw a y s O n - R e a r
4 position.
in the OFF position.
Wipers Ail Modes Inoperative
Step Actions Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Front Wiper/Washer System Check? Go lo
1 — Go to S te p 2 W iperA A /asher
S y s te m C h e c k {
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper washer switch

connector C266.
2. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between C266 cavity E4 and
2 —
ground.
3. Turn ignition switch to the RUN position.
Repair the open in CKT 143 (YEL) between the windshield
wiper washer switch and the l/P fuse block. Refer to Go to
3 W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —
W ip e r/W a s h e r
1. Connect connector C266.

2. Disconnect windshield wiper motor module.
4 3. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between windshield wiper motor --
module connector cavity E and ground.
4. Place the wiper switch in the LO position.
1. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between windshield wiper motor
module connector cavity D and ground.
5 —
2. Place the wiper switch in the HI position.
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between windshield wiper motor
6 module connector cavity B and B+. —
Does the test lamp light? Go to S te p 7 Go to Step 10
Replace the windshield wiper motor module. Refer to Go to
7 W ip e r M o to r R e p la ce m e n t. — W iperA A /asher —
1. Repair open in CKT 96 (BRN) between the windshield

wiper/washer switch and the windshield wiper motor
module. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems.
8 2. If no open was found, replace the windshield —
—
wiper/washer switch. Refer to M u ltifu n c tio n , T urn
S ig n a l a n d H a z a rd S w itc h R e p la c e m e n t - O n V e h icle Go to
in Steering. W iperAA/asher
is the repair complete? S ys te m C h e ck
1. Repair open in CKT 92 (PPL) between the windshield

wiper/washer switch and the windshield wiper motor
module. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems.
9 — —
2. If no open was found, replace the windshield wiper Go to
motor module. Refer to W ip e r M o to r R e p la c e m e n t W iperAA/asher
Is the repair complete? S ys te m C h e c k
Repair open in CKT 150 (BLK) between windshield wiper
motor module and ground. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Go to
10 Wiring Systems.
— —
W iperAA/asher
Wipers Delay Mode Inoperative (Rear)
Step Action I Value(s) | Yes No
DEFINITION: Use this diagnostic table only if the rear wipers operate in the standard operating mode.
Did you perform the Rear Wiper/Washer System Check? Go to
1 — Go to Step 2 WiperAA/asher
System Check
2. Connect a J 34142-B between the rear window
2 wiper/washer switch cavity D, and ground. —
3. Move the switch to DELAY.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the rear window wiper/washer module.
2. Connect a J 34142-B between cavity B and ground.
3 —
3. Move the switch to DELAY.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Replace the rear window wiper/washer switch. Go to
4 Is the repair complete? — Wiper/Washer —
System Check
Replace the rear window wiper/washer module. Refer to Go to
5 Wiper Motor Replacement - Rear. — WiperA/Vasher —
Repair the open in CKT 391 (GRY) between the rear
window wiper/washer module and the rear window
6 wiper/washer switch. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — Go to
Systems. WiperA/Vasher
Wipers Delay Mode Inoperative (Front)

Did you perform the Front Wipers/Washers Go to
1 System Check? — Go to Step 2 WiperAA/asher
System Check
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper/washer switch
connector C266.
2. Place the windshield wiper switch in the LO position.
2 3. Connect a J 39200 digital multimeter (DMM) between 680 Q
cavity E5 for CKT 96 (BRN) and cavity E4 for
CKT 143 (YEL) at the windshield wiper/washer
switch.
Is the resistance near or equal to the specified value? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5
With DMM still connected, move the windshield
wiper/washer switch through the delay range to the
3 maximum delay position while observing the meter. 450 k Cl
Do the readings increase in steps to the
approximate value? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
1. Repair the open in CKT 96 (BRN) or CKT 143 (YEL)
between the wiper/washer switch connector and the
windshield wiper motor module. Refer to Wiring
4 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
2. If the wires are OK, replace the windshield wiper Go to
motor module. Refer to Wiper Motor Replacement Wiper/Washer
Replace the windshield wiper/washer switch. Refer to
Multifunction, Turn Signal and Hazard Switch Replacement Go to
5 - On Vehicle. — —
WiperAA/asher
Wipers High Mode Inoperative, Low Mode 0 perates
Did you perform the Front Wiper/Washer System Check? Go to
1 —- Go to S te p 2 W iperA A /asher
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor module

connector.
3. Place the windshield wiper/washer switch in the HI
2 position. —
4. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between CKT 92 (PPL) at the
windshield wiper motor module connector and
ground.
Did the test lamp light? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 4
3 Wiper Motor Replacement — ■ W iperAA/asher —-
Is the repair complete? S yste m Check
Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between CKT 92 (PPL) at the

windshield wiper/washer switch connector C266 cavity E5
4 and ground. —. .
Repair the open in CKT 92 (PPL) between the windshield
wiper/washer switch connector and the windshield wiper
5 motor module connector. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring — Go to —
Systems. W ip e r/W a s h e r
Replace the windshield wiper/washer switch. Refer to
M u ltifu n c tio n , T urn S ig n a l a n d H a z a rd S w itch R e p la c e m e n t Go to
6 - O n Vehicle. — ;
W ip e r/W a s h e r
Wipers Always On
Did you perform the Front WiperAA/asher System Check Go to
1 — Go to Step 2 W iperAA/asho
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper/washer motor

module connector.
3. Place the windshield wiper/washer switch in the OFF
2 position. —
4. Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 96 (BRN) at the
windshield wiper motor module connector cavity E to
ground.
1. Repair the short to voltage in CKT 96 (BRN) from the

windshield wiper motor module connector to the
windshield wiper/washer switch connector. Refer to
W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems.
3 2. If no short is found, replace the windshield — —
in Steering. W iperAA/asher
Connect a J 34142-B from CKT 92 (PPL) at the windshield
4 wiper motor module connector cavity D to ground. —
Wipers Always On (cont’d)
1. Repair the short to voltage in CKT 92 (PPL) from the
windshield wiper/washer switch connector. Refer to
5 2. If no short is found, replace the windshield — —
in Steering. W ip e r/W a s h e r
6 W ip e r M o to r R e p la c e m e n t — W iperA A /asher —
Washers Inoperative
1. Disconnect the windshield washer pump motor
connector.
2. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B from CKT 228 (RED) at the
1 windshield washer pump motor connector to ground. —
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or RUN position.
4. Push the wiper/washer switch in the WASH position.
1. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B from CKT 228 (RED) to
CKT 150 (BLK) at the windshield washer pump motor
2 connector.
2. Push the washer switch to the WASH position.
Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 digital multimeter (DMM) between the
windshield washer pump motor connector cavity A and
3 wiper motor module connector cavity A. —
Is there continuity? Go to S te p 5 Go to S te p 4
Repair open in CKT 228 (RED) between windshield wiper
4 motor module and windshield washer pump motor. — —
Is the repair complete? System OK
1. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B from CKT 96 (BRN) at the
windshield wiper motor module connector cavity E to
5 ground. —
2. Push the washer switch to the WASH position.
Replace the windshield washer pump motor.
6 — —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) from the windshield
7 washer pump motor connector to ground. — —r
Replace the windshield wiper motor module.
8 — —
1. Repair the open in CKT 96 (BRN) between the
9 windshield wiper/washer switch connector. —
2. If the wire is OK, replace the wiper/washer switch.
Wiper Arm Tip Pressure Check, Blade Blade Element Check
Element Check
Wiper Arm Tip Pressure Check
334256
1. Remove the wiper blades from the wiper arms.

Refer to Wiper Arm Blade Replacement.
1. Run the wiper arms to the mid-wipe position. 2. Look down the length of the blade element.
2. Remove the wiper blades from the wiper arms. 3. Replace the wiper blade element if the rubber
element which contacts the glass is not on the
3. Attach a scale to the end of the wiper arm and centerline of the blade +/-15 degrees. Refer
measure the force required to lift the wiper arm to Wiper Blade Element Replacement.
perpendicular to the windshield to normal working 4. Install the wiper blades on the wiper arms. Refer
height (height with the blade attached).
to Wiper Arm Blade Replacement.
4. Replace the wiper arm if the measurement is not
within the specification. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement.
T ip P r e s s u r e
7.8-9.5 Newtons (28-34 oz)
5. Install the wiper blades on the wiper arms. Refer
Wipers Inoperative - Rear
Step clion Value(s) Yes No
1 — W ip e r/W a s h e r
1. Disconnect the rear window wiper/washer switch.

2 —
3. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B between cavity A and ground.
1. Connect the rear window wiper/washer switch.
2. Disconnect the rear window wiper/washer motor
module.
3 3. Connect a J 3 4 1 4 2 -B from cavity B and ground. —
4. Place the rear window wiper/washer switch to the
ON position.
Repair the open in CKT 393 (WHT) between the IP fuse
block and the rear window wiper/washer switch. Refer to
4 W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. —
Are the rear wipers still inoperative? Go to S te p 5 System OK
Connect a J 3 4 142-B between the rear window
5 wiper/washer module connector cavity A and B+. —
Did the-test lamp light? Go to S te p 7 Go to S te p 8
1. Check for an open in CKT 391 (GRY) between the
rear window wiper/washer module and the rear
window wiper/washer switch. Make the .necessary
6 repairs. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems.
2. If the circuit is OK, replace the rear window Go to
wiper/washer switch. W ip e r/W a s h e r
Is the repair complete? S yste m C h e c k
Replace the rear window wiper/washer module. Refer to Go to
7 W ip e r M o to r R e p la c e m e n t - R ear. — W ip e r/W a s h e r —
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the module Go to
8 and ground. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — W iperAA/asher —
Wipers Always On - Rear
DEFINITION: This diagnostic should only be used when the rear wiper motor runs continuously with the ignition switch is in
ACC or RUN and the switch is in the OFF position.
1 W iperA A /asher
Go to S tep 2 S y s te m C h e c k
Disconnect the rear window wiper/washer switch
2 connector.
Did the rear wiper turn OFF? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 4
3 Is the repair complete? — .. W iperA A /asher —
1. Repair short to power in CKT391 (GRY between the

rear window wiper/washer switch and the rear
window wiper/washer module. Refer to W irin g
R e p a irs in Wiring Systems.
4 ■— —
2. If no short was found, replace the rear window
wiper/washer module. Refer to W ip e r M o to r Go to
R e p la c e m e n t - R ear. W iperA A /asher
Washers Inoperative - Rear

Was the Wiper/Washer System Check performed? Go to
1 — W iperA A /asher
1. Turn ignition to the RUN position.

2 2. Connect a J 3 4 142-B between the rearwindow —
wiper/washer switch connector cavity A and ground.
Repair open in CKT393 (WHT) between the rear window Go to
3 wiper/washer switch and the l/P fuse block. W ip e r/W a s h e r
. -.

wiper/washer switch cavity B and ground.
4 —
2. Depress the rear washer switch.
5 Is the repair complete? — W iperA A /asher —

washer pump motor connector cavity A and ground.
6 —
2. Depress the rear window washer switch.
Repair open in CKT392 (DK GRN) between rear window Go to
7 washer pump and the rear window wiper/washer switch. — W iperA A /asher —
Connect a self powered test lamp between rear window
8 washer pump motor connector cavity B and ground. —
Replace the rear window washer pump motor. Go to
9 Is the repair complete? — W ip e r/W a s h e r —
Repair open in CKT 150 (BLK) between rear window Go to
10 washer pump motor and G113. — W iperA A /asher —
Repair Instructions
Washer Solvent Container Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary battery and battery tray, if
equipped. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement
(Battery Tray Replacement - LH).
2. Remove the two bolts.
3. Disconnect the hose(s) from the washer pump(s).
4. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) from the
washer pump(s).
5. Remove the washer solvent container from the
vehicle.
1. Install the washer solvent container on the
vehicle.
2. Connect the electrical coneetor(s) to the washer
pump(s).
3. Connect the hose(s) to the washer pump(s).
Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
4. Install the two bolts.
T ig h te n
Tighten the two bolts to 6 N-m (53 Ib in).
5. Install the auxiliary battery and battery tray, if
equipped. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement
(Battery Tray Replacement - LH).
524693
W asher Pump Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the washer solvent container from the
vehicle. Refer to W a s h e r S o l v e n t C o n t a i n e r
R e p la c e m e n t.
2. Remove the washer pump(s) from the washer
solvent container.
524694
1. Install the washer pump(s) in the washer solvent
container.
2. Install the washer solvent container on the
vehicle. Refer to W a s h e r S o l v e n t C o n t a i n e r
R e p la c e m e n t.
524694
Wiper Arm Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Mark the position of the wiper blade on the
windshield with a suitable marker or a piece of
masking tape.
2. Remove the washer hose.
3. Lift the wiper arm from the windshield.
4. Disengage the retaining latch with a screwdriver.
5. Remove the wiper arm from the transmission :
drive shaft.
415964
1:, Position the wiper arm on the transmission drive
shaft so that the wiper blade aligns with the mark
made on the windshield before removal.
2. Seat the arm assembly on the drive shaft.
415964
3. Press in the retaining latch.

4. Connect the washer hose.
5. Clean the position mark or masking tape from the
windshield.
6. Operate the wipers and check for proper
operation.
415965
W iper Arm Blade Replacem ent
Removal Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCY position.
2. Set the wiper switch to the PULSE position.
3. Turn the ignition off when the wipers are in the
innerwipe position and not moving.
4. Push in the button of the wiper blade clip and
remove the wiper blade from the inside radius
of the wiper arm.
497480
5. Bring the wiper arm out through the opening in

the wiper blade.
1. Insert the hook of the wiper arm through the
opening in the wiper blade.
497492
2. Position the wiper blade pivot in the inside radius
of the wiper arm hook.
3. Pull the wiper blade pivot into the wiper arm hook
until the pivot locks into the hook.
4. Operate the wipers and check for proper
operation.
W iper Blade Elem ent Replacem ent

Removal Procedure
Important: Replace the wiper blade element if it is
removed from the wiper blade.
1. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
2. Remove the bottom claws (2) of the wiper
blade (1) from the notches in the wiper
blade element (3).
3. Pull the wiper blade element (3) out through the
wiper blade claws (2).
430069
Important: Keep the wiper blade claws in the rubber
claw channel of the wiper blade element. Do not
allow the claws of the wiper blade to contact the metal
spline of the wiper blade element.
1. Insert the open end of the wiper blade element (3)
into the bottom claws of the wiper blade (2).
2. Guide the wiper blade element (3) through the
wiper blade (1) claw sets.
3. Engage the bottom claw (2) of the wiper blade (1)
into the notches in wiper blade element (3).
4. Install the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. Refer
430069
Wiper Motor Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement.
2. Remove the air inlet grille panel. Refer to Air Inlet
Grille Panel Replacement.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the motor.
Im p o rta n t: Do not remove the crank arm.
4. Loosen the nuts attaching the drive link brackets
to the crank arm.
5. Remove the brackets from the wiper motor
crank arm.
6. Remove the three bolts and the wiper motor from
the vehicle.
Notices.
1. Install the wiper motor on the vehicle.
2. Install the three bolts.
T ig h te n
Tighten the three bolts to 7 N-m (62 Ib in).
3. Install the drive link brackets to the wiper motor
crank arm with the right side linkage closest to
the wiper motor.
T ig h te n
Tighten the link nuts to 5 N-m (44 Ib in).
4. Connect the electrical connector to the
wiper motor.
5. Install the air inlet grille panel. Refer to Air Inlet
6. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement.
Wiper Transmission Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. R e m o v e th e w ip er a rm s . R e fe r to Wiper Arm
Replacement.
2. R e m o v e th e a ir inlet grille p a n e l. R e fe r to Air Inlet
3. L o o s e n th e n u ts a tta c h in g th e d riv e link b ra c k e ts
to th e c ra n k arm .
4. R e m o v e th e b ra c k e ts from th e w ip er m o to r
c ra n k arm .
Important: N o te th e p o sitio n of th e right a n d left

tra n s m is s io n links fo r re a s s e m b ly '
5. R e m o v e th e tra n s m is s io n to cow l b o lts.
6. R e m o v e th e tra n s m is s io n a s s e m b ly from th e
v eh ic le .
348767
1. Install th e w ip er tra n s m is s io n a s s e m b ly to th e
v eh ic le .
N o t i c e : R e fe r to Fastener Notice in C a u tio n s a n d
N o tices.
2 . Install th e tra n s m is s io n to cow l bo lts.
Tighten
T ig h ten th e b o lts to 7 N-m (62 Ib in).
348767
3. Install the transmission brackets to the wiper
motor crank arm.
Tighten
Tighten the drive link nuts to 5 N-m (44 Ib in).
4. Install the air inlet grille panel. Refer to Air Inlet
5. Install the wiper arms. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement.
Wiper Motor Module Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the electrial connector from the
wiper motor.
2. Remove the three screws and the wiper
motor cover.
3. Remove the module from the wiper motor.
1. Install the module in the wiper motor.
Notices.
2. Install the wiper motor cover with the three
screws.
T ig h te n
Tighten the three screws to 2.6 N-m (23 Ib in).
3. Connect the electrial connector to the wiper motor.
348761
Wiper Chatter Repair
Some vehicles may exhibit a condition where the
windshield wipers chatter and/or wipe unevenly.
Several items may contribute to this condition. To
completely repair this condition, ALL the items listed
below should be checked and repaired as necessary.
• Windshield Glass Cleaning
• Blade Element Cleaning
• Wiper Arm Pressure Check
• Blade Element Set Check
Windshield Glass Cleaning

Clean the windshield with windshield cleaner,
GM PN 1050011 or equivalent. The cleaner used
should be one which will not harm the paint finish or
scratch the glass. The glass is clean when the
water no longer beads, but sheets across the entire
glass surface.
Blade Element Cleaning

Lift each blade assembly off the windshield and clean
the element with a cloth saturated in full strength
washer solution. Rinse the blade assemblies
with water.
Wiper Arm Replacement - Rear

Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the washer hose.
524691
2. Lift the wiper arm from the windshield.
3. Disengage the retaining latch with a screwdriver.
4. Disengage the washer hose and grommet from

the liftglass.
5. Remove the wiper arm from the wiper motor
drive shaft.
524690
1. Install the wiper arm assembly onto the wiper
motor driveshaft with the wiper blade in parked
position (blade parallel to the edge of the glass)
2. Install the washer hose and grommet in the
liftglass.
524690
3. Lift the wiper arm extension and push in the
retaining latch when the head is fully seated onto
the driveshaft.
4. Connect the washer hose.
Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear

Removal Procedure
1. Insert a narrow-bladed screwdriver into the
release slot over the wiper blade retainer spring.
2. Pivot the screwdriver so that the blade tip presses
downward on the retainer spring and releases the
wiper blade from the pin of the wiper arm.
3. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
348756
1. Install the wiper blade on the wiper arm pin.
2. Snap the wiper blade into place.
Blade Element Replacement - Rear

Removal Procedure
im p o r ta n t: Replace the wiper blade element if it is
removed from the wiper blade.
1. Remove the wiper blade from the
wiper arm. Refer to Wiper Arm Blade
Replacement - Rear.
2. Squeeze the wiper blade element tabs together.
3. Pull the wiper blade element out through the wiper
blade claws.
1. Slide the wiper blade element through the bottom
claw of the wiper blade.
2. Guide the wiper blade element through the wiper
blade claws until both of the locking tabs engage
the bottom claw set.
3. Install the wiper blade on the wiper arm. Refer to
Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear.
Wiper Motor Replacement - Rear
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the wiper arm. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement - Rear.
2. Remove four retainers from the wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the cover from the wiper motor.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
wiper motor.
5. Remove the bolt from the wiper motor.
6. Remove the nut from the liftglass.
7. Remove the nut, the spacer, and the washer from
the wiper motor drive shaft.
8. Remove the wiper motor from the vehicle.
1. Install the wiper motor onto the vehicle.
Notices.
2. Install the washer, the spacer, and the nut on the
wiper motor drive shaft.
T ig h te n
Tighten the nut to 6 N-m (53 Ib in).
3. Install the nut in the liftglass.
4. Install the bolt to the wiper motor.
T ig h te n
Tighten the bolt to 6 N-m (53 Ib in).
6. Install the cover onto the wiper motor.
7. Install four retainers in the cover.
8. Install the wiper arm. Refer to Wiper Arm
Replacement - Rear.

Wiper/Washer System Circuit Description
Wiper/Washer System
In addition to the features of a conventional
(non-pulse) wiper system (mist, low, and high speeds),
the pulse-type windshield wiper/washer system
includes an operating mode in which the wipers make
single sweeps with a time interval between sweeps.
The time interval is controlled by a solid-state timer in
the wiper motor cover assembly. The duration of
the delay interval is determined by the delay resistor
in the wiper/washer switch assembly.
When the wiper switch is turned off, the wiper motor
returns the wipers to the park position.
Pulse Description Rear Wiper/Washer System
With the ignition in the ACC or RUN position, battery Circuit Description
voltage is applied to the wiper motor module
connector cavity C and the windshield wiper / washer
Rear Wiper / Washer System
switch through CKT 143 (YEL). With the wiper The rear wiper / washer system has three operating
switch in the DELAY (pulse) position, voltage is also modes (delay, normal and wash). This system
applied to the windshield wiper motor module incorporate a wiper motor, washer pump, a solid-state
connector cavity E through CKT 96 (BRN) control board in the rear wiper/washer module, and
the rear wiper/washer switch. The system will operate
For variable-pulse systems, the length of delay time any time the ignition is in ACC or RUN.
between sweeps is controlled by the variable-pulse
delay resistor. Delay is adjustable from Delay Description
1-22 seconds, nominally. Voltage is provided to the switch through CKT 393
(WHT). When the switch is placed in the DELAY
Mist Description position, voltage is provided to the rear wiper motor
When the wiper switch is moved to MIST and released, through CKT 391 (GRY) and to the rear wiper/washer
the wipers make one sweep at low speed and module through CKT 97 (LT BLU). Since the rear
return to the park position. If the wiper switch is held wiper/washer module is grounded through CKT 150
in MIST, the wipers will continue to operate until (BLK) to G400, the wiper motor takes a single sweep
the switch is released. The circuit operation is the and returns to the park position until signaled by
same as that of low speed. the rear wiper/washer module to make another sweep.
The solid state control board, in the rear window
Low-Speed Description wiper/washer module, controls the time interval.
In the LO position of the wiper switch, voltage is This time interval is approximately 9 seconds and is
applied, through a fixed resistor in the switch, to the non-adjustable.
wiper motor connector cavity E through CKT 96 (BRN). Wiper Description
The internal circuit board supplies power to the In the ON position, the rear window wiper/washer
wiper motor and ground is supplied through CKT 150 switch supplies voltage to the wiper motor
(BLK) from G200 and the motor runs continuously through CKT 391 (GRY) and to the rear wiper/washer
through the low-speed relay. module through CKT 97 (LT BLU), since the wiper
motor is grounded through the rear wiper/washer
High-Speed Description module, the wiper runs at normal speed.
In the HI position of the wiper switch, battery voltage When the rear window wiper/washer switch is turned
is applied at cavity D of the wiper motor assembly to OFF, the rear window wiper/washer motor runs
through CKT 92 (PPL). at normal speed until the wiper blade reaches
The internal circuit board supplies power to the wiper the PARK position. Then, the park/run relay opens
and signals the rear window wiper/washer to stop the
motor and ground is supplied through CKT 150
wiper blade immediately. The wiper blade remains
(BLK) from G200 and the motor runs continuously
in the PARK position.
in hi-speed.
The rear window wiper motor has a circuit breaker
Park Position Description that protects the motor when the wipers are blocked.
The resulting high current opens the circuit breaker
When turned OFF from any position, the wipers
which resets upon cooling.
complete the last sweep and park. When the wiper
switch is in OFF, the wiper motor assembly has battery Washer
voltage applied to cavity C only, from CKT 143 When the rear window washer switch is pressed,
(YEL). The wiper motor continues to run until the voltage is supplied through CKT 392 (DK GRN) to the
internal motor park switch opens. solid state control board in the rear window
wiper/washer module. The rear window wiper/washer
Washer Description switch also supplies battery voltage through
When the washer switch is turned to ON, battery CKT 392 (DK GRN) to the rear window washer pump
voltage is applied to cavity E of the wiper motor motor. This starts the wiper cycle and the wash
assembly through CKT 96 (BRN). The solid state cycle. The washer continues to run as long as the
circuit applies voltage to the washer pump connector switch is held down. The solid state control board
cavity A through CKT 228 (RED). The wiper motor keeps the wipers on for six seconds after the washer
has voltage applied through the low-speed relay and goes off.
operates at low or high speed for 3-5 wipes. If the washer is switched on during DELAY operation,
If the wipers had been in DELAY, LO, or HI, they the wipers run in low speed for six seconds. When
would return to that operation after the wash cycle. the wash cycle is completed, the wipers return to the
DELAY operation.
If they had been in the OFF position, they would then
return to the park position after 3-5 wipes.
Entertainment
Specifications
Specification
Application Metrir English
Antenna Cable Mounting Screw 5 N-m 581b in
Antenna Mounting Nut 5 N*m 58 lb in
Front Speaker Mounting Screw 2 N-m 181b in
Rear Overhead Speaker Mounting Screw 2 N-m 18 Ib in
Rear Speaker Mounting Screw 2 N-m 18 Ib in
GM SPO Group Numbers

Application GM SPO Group Number
Amplifier 9.650
Antenna 9.647
Radio 9.650
Rear Seat Audio Control .. 9.650
Remote CD Player 9.670
Speakers 9.665

Entertainment Schematic References
Section Number - Subsection
Reference on Schematic Name
Data Link Connector Cell - 50 8 - Wiring Systems
Ground Distribution Cell - 14 8 - Wiring Systems
Interior Lights Diming Cell -117 8 - Wiring Systems
Power Distribution Cell -1 0 8 - Wiring Systems
Entertainment Schematic Icons

Icon Icon Definition
Refer to E S D N o tic e in Cautions and Notices.
330402
492644
RF Speaker
LF Speaker
|Hot At All Times!
I Hot In ACCY And RUN I
8-202
IP
! Power
Distribution Fuse S264
Entertainment
B4 L CIG LTR
1 Cell 10 P Fuse 13 * T laround""™
I C3V 20 A iI Block I 0.8 ORN 640 Distribution
Cell 14
1
0
j o.8 ORN 640 i 02
r —■ Convenience
Power Power
Distribution
1 D2
i
Center
0
Cell 10 L. X Amplifier
0.8 PNK C299 ♦ b " C210
Relay
Radio |a V -
C1 ^ 314
---- $>--- i
il
1 ORN 640 i i
0.8 PNK 314 -------- ■_ — i i S256 0.8 BLK 150
0.8 ORN 640

2 BLK 150
0.8 ORN 360 0.8 BLK S259 Ground

Distribution
13 14 150 Ceil 14
Power
______________________________________________________
Amplifier
Amplifier Ground
Relay A
1.bA
Signal
Speaker Inputs Speaker Inputs

5 BLK 150
I tR Door LR Door RR Door RR Door I
LR(+) L R (-) RR(+) R R (-) <-) <+> (+) (->
4' 12 15 6 9
0.8 TAN 1859 0.8 TAN 1855
0.8 WHT 1959 0.8 RED 1955
0»8 BRN 199 E C498 E D ^_€496
S254 B
0.8 YEL 116 O.VWHT*1959 ■as RED 1955
S252 0.8 TAN 1859 0.8 TAN 1855
[$ > Ground
0.8 DK BLU 46 B B Distribution
Cell 14
S249
0.8 LT BLU 115
S250 1
LR RR
Door Door
Speaker Speaker G202
I Hot In ACCY And RUN j fHS'H^jTTjriesl
Power # — —— 4 Power 3 IP - iDRL/Radio
r
Headlamp Data Link Interior Lights
I Distribution K4 L RADIO Distribution B2 L RADIO BATT * FU S6 1 1Override And Panel Connector Dimming
I Cell 10 P Fuse 17 Cell 10 p Fuse 19 1Block 1 1Switch w^ j Dimmer
Cell 50 Cell 117
L 3 > 10 A C lSf 10 A | L, .
I Switch 14
e
0.5 YEL 43
Antenna 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382 0.35
DKGRN 835
0
0.5 ORN 1140 0.8 PPL/WHT
Coaxiali v Interior Lights 1382 0.35 GRY 8
Cable
Dimming
Cell 117
------------- A ? 8216
0.8 PPL/WHT
0
W/Electric S hit Cl 10 6 15 G2 . 7 Cl
Transfer Case
CONN ID Radio
Cruise Control
Or EVO
C1 = BLK
C2=GRY
/ Ignition
Power
Antenna
lnpyt_ 6V
Battery Power
Input 6V 6V
Display
Dim Signal 6V 0 PANEL
Lamp
K
Off On Input
\ vss
Signal
LR<+)
J.
IR{~) RR(+)
ZZCI
R R (-) L F (-)
X
LF<+) RF(—)
~T"
RF( + )
X
Ground
0.5
DK 0.5 16 20 19 18 17 C2 2 Cl
GRN/ 817 DK GRN/ 817 0.5 4
0.5 BRN 199 0.5 DK BLU 46 0.5 TAN 201 LT GRN 200
WHT WHT
$221 0.5 LT BLU 115
0.5
0.5 YEL 116 0.5 GRY 118 DKGRN 117 0.8 BLK 150
Transfer Case 0.5
Control Module DKGRN/ 817 H G\ E/ F B A C299
Transfer Case WHT Ground
Controls 0.5 BRN 199 0.5 DK BLU 46 0.5 TAN 201 0.5 S298 Distribution
[QaaEnginSI 0.5 YEL 116 0.5 LT BLU 115 0.5 LT GRN 200 Cell 14
0.5 GRY 118
DK GRN 117
E_ D C B C301 A^ B C206 E F C215
D4 C100 D4 C100 ■ ------ - 1 BLK 150
0.5 BRN 199 0.5 DK BLU 46 0.5 TAN 201 0,5
0,5 0.5 0.5 LT GRN 200
DKGRN/ 817 0.5 GRY 118
DKGRN/ 817 0.5 YEL 116 0.5 LT BLU 115 DK GRN 117 Ground
WHT WHT 0.5 GRY 1 0.5 DK GRN Distribution
118
S504 sao3« 117 Cell 14
3 €4 14j['C2 0.5 GRY 118 0.5
r *— t r — t DKGRN 117 0.5 LT GRN
S6041
I
I
I
S
I
1
1
1
1 0.5 TAN
4S505 0.5
200
B A
201 LT GRN 200
i. _ j L. — J LR RR 0.5 TAN 201
Vehicle Vehicle Speakers Speakers 3 BLK 150
Control Speed a Ba B
Module
(VCM)
Sensor
(VSS)
Ol TJ TJ
£
RF
Engine Buffer Speaker
(With UQ3)
Controls LF
Speaker LF RF
iiA (With UQ3) Speaker Speaker G200
8-204
Radio On Radio
Signal IGN Entertainment
Off/Tape Dimming Shield Right Left Audio And Convenience Battery
Entertainment______________________________________________________________________
Control Feed Ground In In Common Ground Serial Data Power Feed
„ ------------- v ---------------- iT r r.
r" 'T o ' r ........... ” 15''
0.35 PNK 314 0.5 BARE 514 0.35 ORN/BLK 1406 0.35 BLK 150 0.35 ORN 1140
0.35 GRY 8 0.35 LT GRN 1407 0.35 TAN 1405 0.35 DK GRN 835
c I\
1. i i i
« i
1 j i i
i i i
i i i
m Shielded < :» Shielded
, 8 9, 10 11 12 . ______ 13, . ______ A t 15

Radio On Dimming Shield Right Left Audio Ground Entertainment Battery Remote
Signal IGN Ground Out Out Common And Convenience Power Feed Playback
Off/Tape Serial Data Unit
Control
492647
Component Locator
Entertainment Com ponents
E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r
Antenna, Radio On the right fender C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Audio Amplifier Underneath the center floor console C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
CD Player In the center floor console C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Headlamp and Panel Lower left side of the IP C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s in
Dimmer Switch Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
To the left of the IP, near the left front C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s in
IP Fuse Block door jamb switch Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
Under the left of the IP, right of the brake E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r
Power Amplifier pedal bracket C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
Under the left of the IP, right of the brake E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r
Power Amplifier Relay pedal bracket C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Radio, Connector C1 In the center of the IP C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
Radio, Connector C2 In the center of the IP C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
In the center of the IP, under the heater E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r

Remote Playback Unit controls C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, LF Door At the lower RH of the LF door E n d V ie w s
C o m p o n e n t V iew s
Speaker, LF Door In the LF door panel

Tweeter C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, LR Behind the LR seat in the pillar C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, LR Door At the lower RH of the LR door C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, LR Tweeter In the LF door panel C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, LR Headliner In the headliner, near the LR door opening E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r
Speaker, RF Door At the lower RF door panel C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, RF Door E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r

In the RF door panel
Speaker, RR Door At the lower left of the RR door C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
Speaker, RR Tweeter Behind RR seat, in B pillar C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V iew s
Speaker, RR Headliner In the headliner, near the RR door opening E n te rta in m e n t E n te rta in m e n t C o n n e c to r
Tweeter C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V iew s
* E n g in e C o n tro ls
* E n g in e C o n tro ls
Vehicle Control Module Engine compartment, near EBCM V C M C o n n e c to r E n d
(VCM) (Gas) • E n g in e C o n tro ls V iew s in Engine Controls
• E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in
Engine Electrical
Entertainment Components (cont’d)
H a rn e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C206 Inside the lower left side A pillar
in Wiring Systems
Systems
C215 Inside the lower right side A pillar
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Behind the left side of the IP, near the H a rn e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C298 convenience center in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a m e s s C o n n e c to r
H a rn e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C301 At the left front kick panel
in Wiring Systems
Systems
C498 In the left side B pillar
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Behind the left side of the IP, below the
G200 fuse block, on the tie bar
Wiring Systems
On the right side of the instrument panel,
G202 mounted to the HVAC plenum bracket
Wiring Systems
S210 IP harness, approx. 14 cm (5.5 in) from
(Diesel) steering column hamess breakout — —
S210 IP hamess, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from

— —
(Gas) auxiliary power outlet breakout
S210 IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) into
(Diesel) instrument cluster breakout
— —
(Diesel and Uplevel) connectors breakout
S216 IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from
(Gas, all except instrument cluster breakout, toward radio ■ _
— ■ ■
Uplevel) connectors breakout
S217 instrument cluster harness breakout, ■ —• ■ ■ ■ — ■ ..
toward radio connectors breakout
S247 into LH door harness breakout
— —

S259 into seat belt switch, toward C212
■— ■ —
S264 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — — ■
connectors breakout
IP harness, approx. 22 cm (8.5 in) before
S292 the radio harness breakout, from C304
... —
S298 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — — ■=■
breakout
Floor console harness, approx. 13 cm
S330 (5 in) from LH heated seat switch breakout
— —
Floor console harness auprox. 22 cm

S331 (8.5 in) from LH heated ' eat switch — —
breakout
Floor console harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in)
S336 from crossbody inline connector hamess — —
breakout
Entertainment Components (cont’d)
Inside LF door harness, approx. 11 cm
S504 (4 in) into window regulator breakout
— —
Inside LF door harness, approx. 11 cm

S505 (4 in) from tweeter speaker breakout, — —
toward LF window regulator
S603 (Suburban/
Inside RF door harness, approx. 4 cm
Utility w/RKE, —-
(1.5 in) from window regulator motor —
Pickup/Extended
breakout, toward door lock motor
Cab w/o RKE)
Inside RF door harness, approx. 4 cm
S604 (Pickup/Extended
(1.5 in) from window regulator motor — —
Cab w/RKE)
breakout, toward door lock motor
Entertainment Component Views

Radio Wiring
331838
Legend
(1) IP Harness (3) Radio Connector, C1
(2) Radio Connector, C2 (4) Radio Connector, C3
Rear Speakers
311431
Legend
(1) Rear Speaker Connector, RR (4) Rear Speaker, LR
(2) Rear Speaker, RR (5) Rear Speaker Connector, LR
(3) Front to Rear Body Harness
Legend
(1) Radio (3) Turn/Hazard Flasher Wiring
(2) Speaker Harness
Rear Speakers (Regular Cab)
(1) Left and Right Rear Speakers

Entertainment Connector End Views
C108 (Inline to Speakers (Z56 Police Package))
12103974
12146045
Connector Part Connector Part 5-Way M Metri-Pack 150
5-Way F Metri-Pack 150 (Natural) Information (Natural)
Information
Circuit Circuit
DKGRN 961 Speaker Return, RF DKGRN 961 Speaker Return, RF
LT BLU 962 Speaker Return, RR LT BLU 962 Speaker Return, RR
GRY 963 Speaker Return, LF GRY 963 Speaker Return, LF
BRN 964 Speaker Return, LR BRN 964 Speaker Return, LR
BLK 965 Ground BLK 965 Ground
Power Amplifier Radio, Connector Cl
(C1^ (C12) (C9j (C6) (C3)

I L i i - t r .\ . j ± . d n
m n o o o a - OOO0
mummiimiiiiniw nnnuiinoi: (ZZ3 D
1---------HJ t JHLJt j -LHJ LHJ-LHJ----------^
283850 62435
Connector Part 12034325 Connector Part • 12047531

Information Conn 15 M Metri-Pack 280 Information * 10 Way F Metri-Pack Series
Series NAT 100 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No* Function
Speaker Feed, Speaker Return,
C1 DK BLU 46 Right Rear . 1 GRY 118
Left Front
Speaker Return, Speaker Feed,
C2 LT BLU 115 Right Rear 2 TAN 201
Left Front
C3 Not Used
3 DKGRN 117 ; Speaker Return,
Speaker Feed, Right Front
C4 BRN 199
Left Rear Speaker Feed,
4 LT GRN 200
Speaker Return, Right Front
C5 YEL 116 Left Rear 5 BLK 150 Ground
Speaker Feed, Right 6 PPL/WHT 1382 LED Dimming Signal
C6 TAN 1855
Rear Midrange
7 GRY 8 Instrument Panel
C7-C8 Not Used Lamp Feed
C9 RED 1955 Speaker Return, Right Radio On Signal
Rear Midrange 8 PNK 314
(Suburban/Utility)
C10-
Not Used 9 YEL Fuse Output Accessory,
C11 43 Type III Fuse
C12 Speaker Feed, Left Fuse Output Battery,
TAN 1859 10 ORN 1140
Rear Midrange Type III Fuse
C13 ORN 360 Amplifier Feed
C14 BLK 150 Ground
WHT Speaker Return, Left
C15 1959
Rear Midrange_____
Radio, Connector C2
! ! □ □ □ □ □ -- □ □ □ a
[m m in n E n ic m n r- - m a n u im n i ........i
| j - .n i i j a j T J i r u i,” u ,u iy i' u i
i
62477
• 12065785
Connector Part
Series (GRY)
C ircuit
11-14 — — Not Used
Diagnostic Signal—
15 DK GRN 835 Entertainment and
Comfort
16
DK GRN/
817
Vehicle Speed S ig n a l-
WHT 4000 Pulses per Mile
17 LT BLU
Speaker Return,
115
Right Rear
Speaker Feed,
18 DK BLU 46
Right Rear
Speaker Return,
19 YEL 116
Left Rear
20 BRN 199
Speaker Feed,
Left Rear
Diagnostic Information and Procedures
Radio/Audio System Check
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Radio display illuminates and sound • S p e a k e rs Inoperative - O n e
ON position, with the is heard from speakers.
• R a d io M e m o ry In o p e ra tiv e
engine OFF.
• R a d io D is p la y In o p e ra tiv e , N o
2. Turn the radio ON. S o u n d from S p e a k e rs
1
3. Position tuner on a strong radio
station.
4. Set the volume control to
medium.
1. Turn the FADE control to the 1. Only front speakers are heard. S p e a k e rs In o p e ra tiv e - O ne
front speakers and then to the 2. Only rear speakers are heard.
2 rear speakers.
3. Front and rear speakers
2. Return FADE control to the are heard.
neutral position.
1. Turn the BAL control to the left 1. Only left side speakers S p e a k e rs In o p e ra tiv e - O ne
side speakers and then to the are heard.
right side speakers. 2. Only right side speakers
3
2. Return BAL control to the are heard.
neutral position. 3. Left and right side speakers
are heard.
1. Depress the RECALL button. 1. Radio display toggles between S p e a k e rs In o p e ra tiv e - O ne
2. Adjust BASS control to the high the tuner and the clock.
and low position. 2. Music attenuates between high
3. Adjust TREB control to the high and low bass frequencies.
4
and low position. 3. Music attenuates between high
4. Return BASS and TREB and low treble frequencies.
control buttons to the neutral 4. Music returns to nominal bass
position. and treble frequencies. -
• Place the headlamp and dimmer Radio Display and the button • Radio Illumination Inoperative
switch in the PARK position. illumination intensity vary. with Park Lamps On
5
• Rotate dimming switch left • R a d io D is p la y In o p e ra tive , N o
to right. S o u n d fro m S p e a k e rs
1. Place a cassette tape in the 1. The cassette tape plays. 9 T ap e P la y e r W eak, S low , o r
tape player. 2. All features operate. G a rb le d O u tp u t
7 2. Operate all of the available 3. The cassette tape ejects. • T ape P la y e r In o p e ra tiv e
features.
3. Eject the cassette.
1. Play a compact disc (CD). 1. CD plays. 9 C o m p a c t D is c In o p e ra tiv e
2. Operate all of the available 2. All features operate. 9 C o m p a c t D is c In o p e ra tiv e -
features. 3. The CD ejects. R e m o te
3. Eject the CD 4. Remote CD player illumination 9 C o m p a c t D is c In o p e ra tiv e -
8 4. Turn the headlamp and panel varies intensity. R e m o te
dimmer switch to the park
position.
5. Adjust the dimming switch to
the maximum intensity and
then to the minimum intensity.
Radio Memory inoperative
Step Action:-9:
. Value(s) Yes No
Has the Radio/Audio System Check been performed? Go to
1 9— R a d io /A u d io
1. Remove the radio from the dash.

2. Disconnect the radio connector C1.
2 3. Connect a J 39200 from the radio connector C1, —
cavity 10 to ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 4
Remove the radio.
Go to
3 Send the radio for repair. R adio/Audio
Repair the open in CKT 1140 (ORN) between the radio
connector C1 and the IP fuse block. Refer to W iring Go to
4 R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —
R adio/Audio
Amplifier Inoperative
Power Amplifier Inoperative
Amplifier Inoperative
1 R a d io /A u d io
G oto S te p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

2. Disconnect the power amplifier connector.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON position with the engine in
the OFF position.
2 —■.
4. Turn the radio on.
5. Measure the voltage from the amplifier connector
cavity 13 to ground using a J 3 9200.
Is there battery voltage. Go to S te p 12 Go to S te p 3
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the amplifier relay connector.
3 —•
3. Connect a J 3 9 200.
Is there battery voltage? Go to S te p S Go to S te p 4
Locate and repair the open in CKT 640 (BRN) between the
IP fuse block and the power amplifier relay connector. Go to
4 Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —-
Radio/Audio
Connect a J 3 9200.
. .5. . —
Locate and repair the open in CKT 360 (ORN) between
the amplifier connector and the amplifier relay connector. Go to
6 Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — .. —
Radio/Audio
is the repair complete? S yste m C h e c k
Connect a J 39 2 00 .
7 —
Connect a J 39200.
8 —
Replace the amplifier relay. Go to
9 Is the repair complete? — R a d io /A u d io —
S yste m C h e c k
Amplifier Inoperative (cont’d)
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the
amplifier relay and ground. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to
10 Wiring Systems. — —
Radio/Audio
Replace the amplifier. Refer to A m p lifie r Replacement. Go to
11 Is the repair complete? — Radio/Audio —
System Check
Connect a J 39200.
12 —
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the
amplifier connector and G202. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to
13 Wiring Systems. — —
Radio/Audio
Radio Display Inoperative, No Sound from S peakers

1 — Radio/Audio
2. Disconnect radio connector C1.
3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position, with the
2 engine in the OFF position. " B+
4 Wjth a JQQ2 QQDMM, measure the voltage in
CKT 1140 (ORN) at the radio connector C1, cavity 10
to ground.
Is the voltage approximately equal to the battery voltage? Go to Step 3 Go to Step L
With a J 39200 DMM, measure the voltage between
3 cavities 10 and 5 of radio connector C1. B+
Is the voltage approximately equal to the battery voltage? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
With a J 39200 DMM, measure the voltage between
4 cavities 9 and 5 of radio connector 01. B+
Is the voltage approximately equal to the battery voltage? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Repair the open in CKT 1140 between radio connector C1
and the IP fuse block. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Go to
5 Systems. — Radio/Audio —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between radio
connector C1 and ground 200. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to
6 Wiring Systems. ■— Radio/Audio —
System Check
Send the radio in for service. Go to
7 Is the repair complete? — Radio/Audio —
System Check
Repair the poor connection or open in CKT 150 (BLK)
between radio connector C1, cavity 9 and the IP fuse Go to
8 block. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — Radio/Audio '—
System Check
Radio Display and/or Buttons Do Not Illuminate
Has the’ Radio/Audio System Check been performed? Go to
1 — R a d io /A u d io
1. Disconnect the radio connector C1.

2 2. Connect a test lamp from CKT 1140 (ORN) at the —
radio connector cavity 10 to ground.
Repair the open in CKT 8 (GRY) located between radio
connector cavity 7 and the fuse block. Refer to W irin g Go to
3 R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. —
R a d io /A u d io
1. Place the ignition to the RUN position.

4 2. Connect a test lamp from cavity 9 of connector C1 to —
ground.
Locate and repair the open in CKT 43 (YEL) between the Go to
5 IP fuse block and the radio connector C1. — R a d io /A u d io ■■—
Connect a test lamp from cavity 5 of the radio Go to

6 connector C1 and B+. — R a d io /A u d io
Does the test lamp light? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S te p 7
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to
7 radio and ground G200. — R a d io /A u d io —
Send the radio in for repair. Go to

8 Is the repair complete? '' ' —" R a d io /A u d io '— :
Radio Display Does Not Dim with IP Dimmer Switch

1 — Radio/Audio
2 Does the radio display vary with the dimming control? — Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 4
Inspect the radio display buttons.
3 Does the radio display respond when you press the —
buttons? Go to S te p 6 Go to S te p 7
2. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
4 3. Turn the radio to the ON position. —
4. Use a J 39200 in order to backprobe from the radio
connector C1, cavity 6 to ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to S te p 5 Go to S te p 8
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Turn the radio to the ON position.
5 3. Use a J 39200 in order to backprobe from the radio 0-10 Volts
connector C1, cavity 7 to ground.
4. Turn the headlamp dimmer switch back and forth.
Is the voltage within the specified range? Go to S te p 7 Go to S te p 9
Radio Display Does Not Dim with IP Dimmer Switch (cont’d)
Refer to In te rm itte n ts a n d P o o r C o n n e c tio n s D ia g n o s is in Go to
6 Wiring Systems. — R a d io /A u d io —
Send the radio in for repair. Go to
7 Is the repair complete? — ■ R a d io /A u d io — .
Repair the open in CKT 1382 (PPL/WHT) between the
radio connector C2 and the headlamp panel dimmer Go to
8 switch. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. —
R a d io /A u d io
Repair the open in CKT 8 (GRY) between the radio
connector C1 and the IP fuse block. Refer to W irin g Go to
9 R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —
R a d io /A u d io
Is the repair complete? S y ste m C h e c k
Tape Player Inoperative

Step Action 'Value(s)- Yes No
1 — - R a d io /A u d io
Go to S te p 2 S y ste m C h e c k
Inspect for obstruction through the tape door.
2 —
Is there an obstruction? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 4
1. Remove the obstruction.

Go to
3 2. Play a tape in the tape player. — R a d io /A u d io
Does the tape player perform correctly? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S te p 4
Service the radio. Go to
Tape Player Weak* Slow, or Garbled Output

Clean all moving parts and the tape head using a cleaning
2 cassette. —
Does the tape play back? Go to S te p 4 Go to S te p 3
Perform a motor speed test with a diagnostic test tape
3 from J 3 9 9 1 6 as described in Audio Systems. —
Is the motor speed OK? Go to S te p 5 Go to S te p 6
Advise the customer about cleaning the tape player Go to
4 periodically. — R a d io /A u d io —
Use a different tape. Go to
5 Does the tape player operate correctly? — R a d io /A u d io
S y s te m C h e c k Go to S te p 6
Compact Disc inoperative
Condition Action
The CD player skips or mutes. • Verify the proper insertion.
• Inspect the disc for scratches, dirt, or fingerprints.
Clean the disc, as necessary.
• Duplicate the complaint condition on a good road surface.
• Verify the complaint condition using a known good disc, preferably a new disc.
• Service the radio, if previous actions do not determine the cause of the
condition.
The CD player displays ERR or • Verify the proper insertion.
ejects the disc.
• Inspect the disc for dirt, scratches or wetness.
ERR appears if moisture condenses on the disc, if a cold disc is inserted in a
hot disc player, or if a hot disc is inserted in a cold disc player.
• Allow one hour for the evaporation of any moisture.
• Verify the complaint condition using a known good disc, preferably a new disc.
• Verify the complaint condition with the customer.
• Determine whether very high internal temperatures in the instrument panel
cause the ejection of the disc.
• Service the radio, if previous actions do not determine the cause of the
condition.
Compact Disc Inoperative - Remote

1. Remove the remote CD player.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position with the engine in
the OFF position.
2 3. Turn the radio to the ON position. —
4. Backprobe the remote CD player connector with a
J 3 9 2 0 0 from cavity 15 to ground.
Is there battery voltage? Go to S te p 4 Go to S te p 3
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1140 (ORN) between
the remote CD player connector and the radio connector. Go to
3 Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —
R a d io /A u d io
Backprobe cavity 15 and cavity 13 of the remote CD player
4 connector with a J 3 9 200. —
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to
5 radio and the remote CD player. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in — R a d io /A u d io —
Wiring Systems. S y s te m C h e c k
With a J 39 2 00 , backprobe cavity 7 of the remote CD
6 player connector to ground. —

Locate and repair the open in CKT 314 (PNK) between the
radio connector and the remote CD player. Refer to W irin g Go to
7 R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. —
R a d io /A u d io
Compact Disc Inoperative - Remote (cont’d)
With a J 3 9 2 00 , backprobe cavity 14 of the remote CD
8 player connector to ground.
Locate and repair the open in CKT 835 (DK GRN)
between the remote CD player connector and the radio Go to
9 connector. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — —
R a d io /A u d io
With a J 3 9 2 00 , backprobe cavity 10 of the remote CD
player connector to ground and cavity 11 of the remote CD
10 player connector to ground. 3-4 Volts
Is the voltage the specified value? Go to S te p 11 Go to S te p 12
Send the remote CD player for repair. Go to
1. Disconnect the remote CD player connector.

2. Disconnect the radio connectors.
12 3. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 between the remote CD player —
connector and the radio connector C3.
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1407 (LT GRN)
between the radio connector C3 and the remote CD player Go to
13 = connector. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs \n Wiring Systems. — — ...
R a d io /A u d io
Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 between the remote CD connector
14 cavity 11 and the radio connector C3 cavity 11. —
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1406 (BRN/BLK)
between the radio connector C3 and the remote CD player Go to
15 connector. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — ■ —
R a d io /A u d io
Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 from cavity 10 of the remote CD player
connector to ground and from cavity 11 of the remote CD
16 player connector to ground. OL
Is the resistance the specified value? Go to S te p 18 Go to S te p 17
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 1407
(LT GRN) or CKT 1406 (ORN/PNK) between the remote
17 CD player connector and the radio connector C3. Refer to Go to —
W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. R a d io /A u d io
Send the radio for service. Go to
Antenna Diagnostic Check Measuring Resistance With a Digital
1. Disconnect the antenna from the extension cable. Multimeter
2. Plug in a test antenna.
Antenna Diag nostic Check
3. Ground the antenna to the vehicle chassis.
Probes On Indication (Ohms)
4. Do not touch the antenna.
3 and 4 Less than 0 2
5. Test the radio reception in an area away from Less than 0 2
1 and 2
electrical interference such as the following items:
2 and 4 infinite
• Tall buildings
1 and 3 infinite
• Metal structures
1 and 4 infinite
• Power lines
2 and 3 infinite
• Florescent lighting
*While measuring, wiggle lead - in tip and cable; the
• Power tools indications should not vary.
6. Tune into the high and the low ends of the radio
dial on both FM and AM, checking for weak and
strong station reception.
7. If the reception is satisfactory, the problem exists
in the antenna and/or the lead-in cable.
8. If the reception is still poor, refer to Diagnosis
earlier in this section.
Testing for Good Ground of Antenna Mounting
and Connections
• Poor grounds at the antenna mounting, or any
other connection in the antenna/lead-in system,
can result in seriously reduced radio performance.
• A poor ground can be a reason for excess ignition
noise on AM or bad audio.
• Make sure that the lead-in connectors are free of
dirt and corrosion, and are tightly fastened.
• Possible ground loss Qr high-resistance ground
points include the following steps:
- Antenna upper mounting (loose screws, paint
555Q
overspray, etc.)
- Lead-in cable connector at the antenna, Usually, a broken center conductor of the lead-in
(loose or internally corroded) cable will result in no AM and weak FM radio
stations.
- Lead-in cable connector at the antenna
(loose or internally corroded) In case of continued reception or noise complaints,
always check the lead-in with an ohrrimeter.
- Quick connect connector (corroded)
When checking resistance; wiggle the lead-in
- Missing ground lead
tip (3) and cable (4).
If the readings shown in the accompanying table
are not obtained, some portion of the lead-in is
intermittent.
2. Replace the lead-in.
Speakers inoperative - One
1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Disconnect the speaker connector.
2 3. With a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM, measure the resistance of the 4-15 0
speaker.
Is the resistance within the specified range? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 5
1. Disconnect the radio connectors.

3 2. With a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM, measure the resistance at the —
speaker from cavity A to ground.
Is the resistance infinite? Go to S te p 4 Go to S te p 7
With a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM, measure the resistance of the
4 speaker feed circuits at the radio. —
Is the resistance infinite? Go to S te p 5 Go to S te p 7
1. Reconnect the speaker.

5 2. With a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM, measure the resistance of the 4-15 0
speaker feed circuits at the radio.
Is the resistance within the specified range? Go to S te p 9 Go to Step 10
Replace the speaker. Go to
6 Is the repair complete? — R a d io /A u d io — ■.
Repair the short to ground in the speaker feed circuit. Goto
7 Refer to W irin g Repairs in Wiring Systems. — R a d io /A u d io —
Is the repair complete? S y s te m Check
Repair the poor connections at the radio or speaker. Refer Go to
8 to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. ■ — ■- Radio/Audio
Is the repair complete? S y s te m C h e c k Go to S te p 10
1. Repair any poor connections at the speaker. Refer to

2. Repair any poor connections at the in-line
connectors. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring
9
Systems. —
3. Repair any opens in the speaker feed circuits. Refer Go to
to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. R a d io /A u d io
Repair Instructions
Radio Replacement
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console.
3. Use a small screwdriver in order to release the
radio retainers.
4. Slide the radio forward in order to remove
the radio.
5. Remove the electrical connectors.
6. Remove the antenna connection.
264160
1. Install the antenna connection.
2. Install the electrical connectors.
3. Slide the radio into the instrument panel in order
to install the radio.
The unit should snap into the retainers when the
unit is fully seated.
4. Install the instrument panel trim.
6. Verify the component’s operation.
Amplifier Replacement
Removal Procedure
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed.
3. Disconnect the amplifier (2) from the bracket.
1. Connect the amplifier (2) to the bracket.
2. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed.
Inspect the circuit operation.
Rear Seat Audio Control Replacement

Removal Procedure
1 . Remove the negative battery cable.
2 . Remove the console storage bin. Refer to
Console Storage Bin Replacement.
3. Remove the RSA controls from the console by
pressing in the 6 tabs. There are 2 tabs on the
top, 2 tabs on the bottom, 1 tab on the right,
and 1 tab on the left of the RSA.
4. Remove the rear seat audio (RSA) connectors.
288157
1. Install the rear seat audio connectors.
2. Install the rear seat audio control into the console.
3. Install the console storage bin. Refer to Console
Storage Bin Replacement.
288157
Cassette Player Care and Cleaning

1. Clean tape players regularly in order to reduced
the possibility of reduced sound quality, ruined
cassettes, or a damaged mechanism.
2. Store cassette tapes in cassette cases away from
contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme heat.
3. For the best operation of the cassette tape
player, do not use cassette tapes that are
longer than 90 minutes in playback time
(45 minutes per side).
Cassette tapes longer than 90 minutes may cause
tape slippage or jamming.
Tape Head and Capstan Cleaning

There are 2 parts that need to be cleaned on a tape
player: the head and the capstan.
1. Since the head and the capstan can be reached
through the tape door, leave the tape player in the
vehicle.
Clean the head and the capstan every 50 hours of
operation.
2. In order to clean the head and the capstan, use a
cotton swab dipped in ordinary rubbing alcohol, or
use a cleaning cassette.
As an alternate way to clean the head and the
capstan, a cleaning cassette kit may be
purchased.
3. Follow the instructions included with the kit to
clean the tape player.
4. Do not contact the tape head with
magnetized tools.
If the head becomes magnetized, cassette sound
quality will be degraded.
5. No service is performed on tapes.
Warranty of these tapes is handled by the
cassette manufacturer, not by the dealer.
Clean Tape Indicator Feature
The cassette and remote cassette units will remind the
user to clean the cassette head.
After 50 hours of cassette operation, CLN will appear
briefly in the display when a cassette is inserted or
when the power is cycled in cassette mode.
The clean tape indicator will be cancelled and the
timer reset when the eject button is pressed and held
for approximately 5 seconds.
When the feature has been cancelled, CLN appears
on the screen.
Remote CD-Player Replacement---

Removal Procedure
Cautions and Notices
1. Disconnect the negative, battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console.
radio retainers.
4. Remove the playback device.
5. Remove the electrical connectors. ; ;'
Installation Procedure .
2. Install the playback device.
3. When the playback device is fully seated, snap
the unit into the retainers.
4. Install the accessory trim plate.
6. Verify the component operation. ;
Remote CD Changer Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the GD magazine if one is inserted in the
CD changer by pressing the EJECT button.
Cautions and Notices,
3. Remove the console storage bin. Refer to
Console Storage Bin Replacement.
4. Remove the CD changer to console screws.
5. Remove the CD changer from the console.
Slide the CD changer up and toward the center of
the console.
6. Remove the electrical connector from the
CD changer.
1. Install the electrical connector to the CD changer.
2. Install the CD changer to the console.
Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
3. Install the CD changer to console screws.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 6 N-m (53 Ib in).
4. Install the console storage bin. Refer to Console
Storage Bin Replacement.
Compact Disc Care and Cleaning

• No maintenance is required for the compact
disc player.
• Do not use a CD lens cleaner.
Use of a CD lens cleaner may contaminate
the lens.
• Handle CD’s carefully.
Store CD’s in their original cases, or other
protective cases, and away from direct sunlight
and dust.
- If the surface of a disc becomes soiled,
dampen a cloth in a mild detergent solution in
order to clean the disc.
Wipe the cloth from the center of the CD to the
edge of the CD.
Never touch the signal surface when
handling discs.
- Pick up the edge of the center hole and the
outer edge.
Fixed Antenna Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the antenna mast (1).
2. Remove the nut (2).
3. Remove the bezel (3).
4. Disconnect the antenna cable from the
extension cable (6).
5. Remove the screws (5).
6. Disconnect the cable assembly.
264191
1. Connect the antenna cable assembly.
Notices.
2. Install the screws (5).
Tighten
3. Connect the antenna cable to the
extension cable (6).
4. Install the bezel (3).
5. Install the nut (2).
Tighten
Tighten the nut to 5 N-m(58 Ib in).
6. Install the antenna mast (1).,
Antenna Extension Cable Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the roll out instrument panel. Refer to IP
Carrier Replacement
2. Disconnect the extension cable (1, 2) from
the radio.
3. Disconnect the extension cable from the
HVAC duct.
264199
4. Disconnect the extension cable from the antenna.
264201
Installation Procedure '

1. Connect the extension cable (1, 2) to the radio.
2. Connect the extension cable to the HVAC duct.
264199
3. Connect the extension cable to the antenna.

4. Roll the instrument panel back into place.
5. Secure the instrument panel.
Speaker Replacement (Front Side Door)

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel
Replacement - Side Front Door in Doors.
speaker retainer.
4. Remove the speaker.
264164
2. Install the speaker.
Snap the speaker into the retainer when the
speaker is fully seated.
Notices.
3. Install the screws
Tighten
4. Install the trim panel.
5. Inspect the component’s operation.
264164
Speaker Replacement
(Front Door Armrest)
Removal Procedure
1. Lift the armrest speaker cover at the rear edge in
order to remove the armrest speaker.
2. Slide the cover back from the armrest speaker in
order to disconnect the front retainer.
4. Rotate the speaker in order to remove the
speaker.
1. Connect the speaker to the cover by rotating the
speaker.
The speaker should snap into the retainer when it
is fully seated.
3. Slide the speaker cover into the front slots.
4. Lower the armrest speaker cover in order to
connect the retainers.
Speaker Replacement (Rear)
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the speaker grille.
264171

264173

Notices.
Tighten
264169
4. Install the speaker grille.

Verify the component’s operation.
Speaker Replacement (Side Door)
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the retainers.
1. Install the electrical connectors.
3. Install the retainers.
264181
Speaker Replacement (Rear Overhead)
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the roof inner trim panel, if necessary.
Refer to Headliner Replacement (Suburban) or
Headliner Replacement (Utility) in Interior Trim.
4. Remove the speaker from the bracket.
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as
necessary.
1. Connect the electrical connectors, as necessary.
2. Install the speaker to the bracket.
Notices.
Tighten
4. Install the roof inner trim panel, if necessary.
264184
Radio/Audio System Description Volume (VOLUME)
The radio receiver mounts in the instrument panel • The radio power switch is the same knob as the
using snap-fit retainers. volume control. Use the radio power switch/volume
control knob in order to turn the system ON and
The radio receiver and the amplifier are an integral
OFF and in order to control the volume.
design.
• In order to increase the volume and in order to
No remote amplifier is used.
turn the radio ON, turn the knob clockwise.
The following radio systems are available:
• In order to decrease the volume or in order to turn
UM7 the radio OFF, turn the knob counterclockwise.
• AM/FM Stereo • The ignition lock cylinder must be in the
• Seek and Scan ACCESSORY or the RUN position in order for the
radio to operate.
• Clock
• 7 FM and 7 AM Preset Stations Recall (RECALL)
• Press the volume control push button in order to
UM6 alternately cause the display to change from the
• AM/FM Stereo time of day (TOD) to the radio frequency
• Seek and Preset Scan display when the radio is ON.
• Auto-Reverse Cassette • Press the volume control knob in order to display
• Clock the TOD with the ignition OFF.
• 14 FM and 7 AM Preset Stations Band Switching (AM/FM)
ULO • Depress the lower knob in order to change the
• AM/FM Stereo radio band between AM and FM.
• Seek and Scan • Depress the lower knob in order to tune into the
last frequency selected on the opposite band.
• Auto-Reverse Cassette The display will indicate the frequency and AM or
• Automatic Tone Control FM mode.
• Music Search
Tuning (TUNE)
• Clock
• Rotate the TUNE knob clockwise in order to
• Preset Scan increase the AM or FM frequency.
• Speed Compensated Volume • Rotate the TUNE knob counterclockwise in order
• 12 FM and 6 AM Preset Stations to decrease the AM or FM frequency.
UNO Treble/Bass (TREB/BASS)
• AM/FM Stereo • Slide the TREB level up in order to increase the
• Seek and Scan treble response.
• Compact Disc • Slide the TREB lever down in order to reduce the
• Automatic Tone Control noise if the station is weak or noisy.
• Clock • Slide the BASS lever up in order to increase the
• Preset Scan bass response.
• Speed Compensated Volume Adjust the BASS lever in order to create a
• 12 FM and 6 AM Preset Stations pleasing sound to your ear.
RMCD-1 Balance (BAL)

Remote Compact Disc Player • Turn the control behind the upper knob in order to
move the sound to the left or the right speakers.
Radio/Audio System Operation (UM7) • Use the middle position in order to balance
the sound between the speakers.
Clock
In order to set the clock, perform the following steps: Fade (FADE)
1. Press the SET push button. • Turn the control behind the lower knob in order to
move the sound to the front or the rear speakers.
2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the SEEK right
arrow key until the correct minute appears on the • Use the middle position in order to balance
display. the sound between the speakers.
3. In order to set the hour, press and hold the SEEK
left arrow key until the correct hour appears on
the display.
Seek (SEEK)
1. Press the right arrow button in order to tune into
the next station higher in frequency that has
sufficient signal strength to be listenable.
2. Press the left arrow button in order to tune into
the next station lower in frequency that has
sufficient strength to be listenable.
Scan (SCAN)
1. Press both SEEK buttons in order to listen to a
few seconds of each radio station. SCAN will
light up on the display.
the next higher station
3. Press the left arrow button in order to tune into
the next lower station.
4. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons in order to
stop scanning.
Set (SET) Push button Press any 2 adjacent station push buttons at the
same time.
Use the SET button along with the radio station preset
push buttons In order to program the radio frequencies The SET on the display will go out. The station
into the memory locations. Refer to Radio Frequency will return when the same two push buttons are
Preset Pushbuttons for instructions on presetting radio pressed again.
stations. Loudness
Radio Frequency Preset Push buttons The UM7 stereos contain an auto-loudness feature.
Up to 14 stations can be preset into the radio’s The auto-loudness feature boosts low-frequency audio
response to compensate for the inability of the ear
memory. In order to preset 4 AM and 4 FM stations,
to hear low-level, low-frequency tones.
perform the following steps:
This compensation varies inversely with the volume
1: Tune into the desired radio station. control setting.
2. Press the SET push button. That is, at low volume settings, the low frequencies
SET will appear on the display. are boosted much more than at high volume settings.
3. Press any station push button.
Radio/Audio System Operation (UM6)
The SET on the display will go out. The radio will
then tune into the selected station whenever Clock
that push-button is pressed. In order to set the clock, perform the following steps:
4. If electrical power is interrupted (by a open fuse, 1. Press the SET push button.
discharged battery, service procedure, etc.), the 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the SEEK right
station(s) and time of day must be reset. arrow key until the correct minute appears on the
In order to preset 3 additional AM, FM1, and FM2 display.
stations, perform the following steps: 3. In order to set the hour, press and hold the SEEK
1. Tune into the desired radio station. left arrow key until the correct hour appears on
the display.
2. Press the SET push-button.
SET will appear on the display.
Volume (VOLUME) Fade (FADE)
• The radio power switch is integral with the volume • Turn the control behind the lower knob in order to
control. move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
• Use the radio power switch/volume control knob in • Use the middle position in order to balance the
order to turn the system ON and OFF. sound between the speakers.
• Use the radio power switch in order to control the Seek (SEEK)
vol ume.
• The ignition lock cylinder must be in the the next station higher in frequency.
ACCESSORY or RUN position in order for the
radio to operate. 2. Press the left arrow button in order to tune into
the next station lower in frequency.
• Turn the radio power switch clockwise in order to
turn the system ON. In order to tune into a radio station of higher or
lower frequency, the station must have sufficient
• Turn the radio power switch clockwise in order to strength in order for the station to be listenable.
increase the volume.
• Turn the radio power switch counterclockwise in Set/Eject (SET/EJECT) Push buttons
order to turn the system OFF. Use the SET/EJECT button along with the radio
• Turn the radio power switch counterclockwise in station preset push buttons in order to program the
order to decrease the volume. radio frequencies into the memory locations. Refer to
Radio Frequency Preset Push buttons for instructions
Recall (RECALL) on presetting radio stations.
• Press the volume control push button in order to Radio Frequency Preset Push buttons
alternately cause the displ ay to change from the
time of day (TOD) to the radio frequency display. Up to 21 stations (7 AM, 7 FM1, and 7 FM2 stations)
can be preset into the radio’s memory.
The radio must be turned ON in order to
perform the RECALL procedure. In order to preset 4 AM, 4 FM1, and 4 FM2 stations,
perform the following steps:
• Press the volume control knob in order to display
the time of day while the radio is turned OFF. Tune into the desired radio station
Press the SET push button.
Band Switching (AM/FM)
Set will appear on the display.
Press the l ower knob in order to switch between AM,
FM1, and FM2. The display indicates the current band. Press a station push button.
The SET on the display will go out. The radio will then
Tuning (TUNE) tune into the selected station whenever that push
• Rotate the TUNE knob clockwise in order to button is pressed.
increase the AM or FM frequency. If electrical power is interrupted (by an open fuse,
• Rotate the TUNE knob counterclockwise in order discharged battery, service procedure, etc.), the
to decrease the AM or FM frequency. station(s) and time of day must be reset.
Treble/Bass (TREB/BASS) In order to preset 3 additional AM, FM1, and FM2
stations, perform the following steps:
• Slide the TREB lever up in order to increase the
treble response. Tune into the desired radio station.
• Slide the TREB lever down in order to reduce Press the SET push button.
noise if the station is weak or noisy. SET will appear on the display.
• Slide the BASS lever up in order to increase the Press any 2 station adjacent push buttons at the
bass response same time.
• Adjust the BASS lever in order to create a The SET on the display will go out.
pleasing sound to your ear. The station will return when the same 2 push buttons
Balance (BAL) are pressed again.
• Turn the control behind the upper knob in order to Preset Scan (PSCAN)
move the sound to the left or the right speakers Any stations already stored on the preset push
• Use the middle position in order to balance buttons can be sampled by the PSCAN mode.
the sound between the speakers. 1. In order to use PSCAN, press both SEEK push
buttons in order to scan through each of the
preset stations.
The system will scan through and play each
preset station for a few seconds.
2. Press either SEEK or RECALL in order to stop
scanning through the preset stations.
Loudness Volume (VOL)
The auto-loudness feature boosts low-frequency audio Rotate the volume control in order to increase or
response in order to compensate for the inability of decrease the volume.
the ear to hear low-level, low-frequency tones. The volume knob is capable of rotating continuously.
The auto-loudness compensation varies inversely with
the volume control setting. Speed Control Volume (SCV)
At low volume settings, the low frequencies are • The AM/FM stereo with Integral Cassette Tape
boosted much more than at high volume settings. Player (UM) features Speed Control
Volume (SCV).
Cassette Tape Player The volume level automatically adjusts to
1. In order to play a tape, the ignition lock cylinder compensate for road and wind noise as you drive.
must be in the ACCESSORY or RUN position • In order to use the SCV, adjust the volume to
and the receiver must be turned ON. the listening level you want at any time.
Tapes are end-loaded into the cassette player. • As you drive, the volume will change in order to
The tape players works best with tapes that match the noise present at any particular speed.
are 30-45 minutes long on each side. Longer The volume should always sound the same
running tapes may not work well in these players level to you as you drive.
because they are usually too thin.
• Each detent on the SCV allows a little more
2. Insert the tape squarely through the door, exposed compensation at a faster rate.
tape side of the cassette facing to the right.
3. When the tape is fully inserted, the AM/FM portion Band Switching (AM/FM)
of the radio will turn off and the tape will begin Press the AM/FM push-button to switch between AM,
playing. FM1, and FM2. The display indicates the current band.
4. Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower Recall (RECALL)
knobs for the volume, the balance and the fade
• Press the RECALL push-button in order to display
just as with the radio.
the station when the radio is ON and in the
5. An arrow indicates which side of the tape is clock mode.
being played.
• When the ignition is OFF, press the RECALL
6. Press the SEEK right arrow key in order to fast push-button in order to recall the time of day.
forward the tape.
• The RECALL push button switches between the
7. The tape will advance rapidly until the SEEK left station and the time of day.
arrow is pressed.
8. Press the SEEK left arrow key in order to rewind Tuning
the tape. • Press lightly on the TUNE control in order to
9. The tape will rewind rapidly until the SEEK right release the tune control from the tune control’s
arrow is pressed. recessed position.
10. Press the upper knob in order or to go from one • Rotate the TUNE knob to the right in order to
side of the tape to the other. increase the frequency.
11. Press the EJECT push button in order to remove • Rotate the TUNE knob to the left in order to
the tape or in order to stop the tape and switch to decrease the frequency.
the radio. • Push the TUNE control back while not in use.
Seek (SEEK)
Radio/Audio System Operation (UNO)
• Press the right arrow key in order to tune into the
The ignition lock cylinder must be in the ACCESSORY next higher station.
or RUN position in order to operate the radio. • Press the left arrow key in order to tune into the
Push the PWR knob in order to turn the radio ON. next lower station.
Clock Audio is muted during the SEEK operation.
In order to set the clock, perform the following steps: Scan (SCAN)
1. Push and hold the HR button until the correct • Press and hold SEEK for 2 seconds. SCAN will
hour appears on the display. appear on the display.
2. Press and hold the MN button until the correct • Use SCAN in order to listen to each radio station
minute appears on display. for a few seconds.
There is an initial 2 second delay before the clock • Press SEEK again in order to stop scanning.
goes into the time-set mode. Audio is muted during the SCAN operation.
3. Press RECALL or HR/MN in order to display the
clock with the ignition OFF.
The time will be displayed for a few seconds.
Automatic Tone Control (ATC) Press and hold one of the 6 push buttons until audio
• The automatic tone control (ATC) feature tailors returns (approximately 2 seconds).
the equalization to the type of broadcast being Whenever you press that push button, the preset
received. station will return.
• Press AUTO TONE in order to step through the The AUTO TONE that you selected will also be
six preset equalization settings of CLASSIC, automatically selected for that push button.
NEWS, ROCK, POP, JAZZ, or C/W
(Country Western).
Preset Scan (PSCAN)
Note the graph and words in the display for each • Any stations already stored in preset memory can
press of the push button. be sampled by the PSCAN mode.
• One or more presses of the AUTO TONE • In order to use PSCAN, press the PSCAN push
button.
push-button will bring up manual (MAN) and return
the control of tone back to the TREB and BASS PSCAN will scan each of the presets and stop for
controls. a few seconds.
• Any time that a BASS or TREBLE control is • The AUTO TONE setting stored for that station
rotated, tone is automatically set to MAN. will be automatically chosen.
• The tuner will pause momentarily, then continue
Bass (BASS) scanning until PSCAN or one of the preset
Depress the BASS control in order to remove the push buttons is pressed again.
control from the control’s recessed position.
PSCAN will appear in the display whenever the
Rotate the BASS control to the right in order to tuner is in the PSCAN mode.
increase bass response. The channel number (P1-P6) will appear
If less bass is desired, rotate the BASS control to momentarily just before the frequency is
the left. displayed.
This control has a center detent position. Push the
button back in to store the button when not in use.
Balance (BAL)
Operation of this control will switch the radio’s AUTO Depress the BAL control in order to remove the
TONE feature to MAN. control from the control’s recessed position.
Rotate the balance in order to adjust the sound
Treble (TREB) between the right and left speakers.
Depress the TREB control in order to remove the This control features a center detent. Push the button
TREB control from the TREB control’s recessed back in to store the BAL control when not in use.
position.
Pull the TREB control out to a fully extended position
Fade (FADE)
in order to make TREB adjustments. 1. Depress the FADE control in order to remove the
Rotate the TREB control to the right in order to FADE control from the FADE control’s recessed
position.
increase the treble response.
In order to decrease the amount of treble desired, 2. Rotate the FADE control knob in order to adjust
rotate the TREB control to the left. the sound between the front and back speakers.
The TREB control has a center detent position. Push 3. This control features a center detent. Push the
the button back in to store the button when not back button in to store the FADE control settings
in use. when not in use.
Operation of the TREB control will switch the radio’s 4. Rotate the FADE control knob in order to adjust
AUTO TONE feature to MAN. the sound between the front and back speakers.
Station Presets Clock

Six push buttons store stations in preset memory. In order to set the clock, Perform the following steps:
You can set the push buttons for up to 18 stations 1. Press and hold the HR or MIN push button
(6 AM, 6 FM1, and 6 FM2). until the clock begins to change.
In order to store a station in preset memory, perform 2. There will be an initial 2 second delay before the
the following steps: clock goes into the time-set mode.
Tune into the desired station, using the TUNE knob 3. Release the push button when the correct time is
or SEEK. displayed.
Press TONE in order to select the graph that best 4. The clock may be set with the vehicle turned OFF.
suits the type of station selected.
Cassette Player (ULO) Dolby® Noise Reduction
• If the ignition is ON but the radio is OFF, and a Press the Dolby push-button in order to reduce
tape is inserted, the tape will begin playing. inherent tape noise such as hiss. The Dolby® symbol
A tape symbol, accompanied by tape direction will appear in the display.
arrows, is shown in the center of the graphic Fast Forward (FWD)
display whenever a tape is playing.
Press FWD in order to fast-forward the tape. The tape
• Tapes are end-loaded into these players. Insert will rapidly advance to the end of the tape or until
the tape squarely through the door, exposed you press the FWD push-button again.
tape side of the cassette facing the right.
The radio will play the last selected station during the
• When the tape is fully inserted, the AM/FM portion FWD operation.
of the radio will turn OFF and the tape will begin
playing. Tape/Auxiliary (TAPE/AUX)
• The tape player works best with tapes that are Press the AM/FM push buttons after inserting a tape
30-45 minutes long on each side. Longer in order to switch between tape and radio. The radio
tapes may not work well in the cassette player will play.
because the tapes are so thin. In order to return to tape, press TAPE AUX. The
• The player automatically senses the tape cartridge display will show the proper tape direction indicator.
for metal or CR02 tape media and presets the
pre-emphasis. Eject (EJECT)
For metal tapes, a metal tape indicator will be In order to remove the tape, press EJECT.
displayed. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or the
• Any time a tape is playing, use the volume, radio OFF.
balance, fade, treble, and bass just as Cassettes may be loaded with the radio OFF, and the
with the radio. ignition off.
An arrow indicates which side of the tape is being CD Adapter Kits
played.
• Although not a recommended practice, you may
Previous (PREV) use a CD adapter kit with a cassette tape
• Press the SEEK or the PREV push buttons in player.
order to search for the previous selection. • The adapter kit cassette should begin playing like
The tape direction arrow blinks during SEEK a regular audio cassette tape once inserted.
operation. • If the cassette immediately ejects, perform the
• A minimum 3 second blank gap is required for following steps:
proper operation. 1. Turn the radio off.
• Audio is muted during SEEK. 2. Turn the ignition on.
Program (PROG) 3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button.
4. Wait for the tape icon to flash on the display
Press the PROG push button in order to play the
other side of a tape. while holding the TAPE AUX button.
The tape direction will reverse automatically. 5. Insert the adapter cassette again.
The adapter cassette will power up the
Next (NEXT) radio and begin playing.
Press the SEEK or NEXT push buttons in order to This override routine will remain active until
search for the next selection. EJECT is pressed.
If you hold this push button, or press the push button
more than once, the tape will advance further.
Tape Clean Indicator
ULO models have an indicator that appears every
Audio is muted during NEXT command.
50 hours or so of tape operation, as a reminder that
Reverse (REV) the capstan and pinch roller need to be cleaned.
Press REV in order to rewind the tape. The tape will This cleaning does not require that the tape player be
rapidly reverse to the beginning of the cassette or until removed from the vehicle.
you press the REV push-button a second time.
The radio will play the last selected radio station during
the REV operation.
Compact Disk Player (UNO) Recall (RECALL)
1. In order to operate the Compact Disc player, • Press RECALL in order to see what track is
perform the following steps: playing.
1.1. Press the PWR knob to turn the system On. • Press RECALL again within 5 seconds in order to
1.2. Insert a disk part way into the slot, label view elapsed time.
side up.
The elapsed time is displayed in minutes and
1.3. Wait a few seconds. seconds.
1.4. The disk should then begin to play, and a • Press RECALL again in order to return to the time
CD symbol will appear in the display.
of day.
1.5. I f the disc is very hot, or if you’re driving on
a very rough road, a disc may come out or • The track number appears when a new track
just not play. starts to play.
When the disc player is too hot to play a Band Switching (AM/FM)
disc, ERR will appear on the display.
While a compact disc is playing, press the AM/FM
2. When the disc player returns to normal push button in order to cancel the CD player and
temperature, the disc should play again. return to the radio.
If the disc still will not play, check for the following
The CD symbol will still be displayed, but the word CD
possible problems:
will be replaced by FM1, FM2, or AM in the display.
• An upside down disc
If the radio is turned OFF during compact disc
• A dirty, scratched, or wet disc
playback, the disc stays in the player. The CD will
• Too much moisture in the air resume playing at the point where the CD stopped.
If there is too much moisture in the air, wait
about one hour and try again. Compact Disc/Auxiliary (CD/AUX)
• The vehicle is operating on a very rough road. The CD/AUX push-button switches between CD play
mode and radio operation.
Previous Track (PREV)
When a CD is inserted, the CD plays until the AM/FM
Press SEEK down or PREV in order to search for the
push-button is pressed.
previous selection.
Hold the push button or press it more than once to The CD will cease playback and the radio will play
back up the disc further. after the AM/FM push button is pressed.
Audio is muted during SEEK. Ejecting a Compact Disk (EJECT)
Random Playback (RDM) Press EJECT in order to release the disc from the CD
The random playback feature a l lows the tracks on the player. The disc will eject and the radio will play.
compact disc to be played in random order rather The disc will start at track 1 when you reinsert it.
than in sequential order.
In order to start or stop the random playback feature,
Theft Deterrent (THEFTLOCK)
press RDM. • The UNO and ULO radios are equipped with
During random playback, a RANDOM indicator THEFTLOCK theft deterrent.
appears in the displ ay. The THEFTLOCK theft deterrent causes the unit
Next Selection (NEXT) to be inoperative should the radio be removed
from the vehicle.
Press SEEK up or NEXT in order to search for the
next selection. Hold the push-button or press it more • The theft deterrent is enabled (SECURE mode) by
than once in order to advance the disc further. entering a user-selected code into the unit.
Audio is also muted during NEXT. • The user-selected code must be re-keyed into the
Reverse (REV) unit following any interruption of battery voltage
Press and hold the REV button in order to return to resume normal operations.
rapidly to a favorite passage. This is an audible search • When battery power is disconnected from a
at a high rate of speed. secured radio, the radio will not turn On and LOC
Release REV in order to resume play at a will appear on the display.
normal speed. • If the correct code is not entered, the unit will
Forward (FWD) become inoperable and remain in the
Press and hold FWD in order to advance quickly LOCKED mode.
within a track. This is an audible search at a high • Any theft deterrent input mode may be exited by
rate of speed. cycling either the radio power or ignition.
Release FWD in order to resume play at
normal speed.
Activating Theftlock 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold then
In order to activate the THEFTLOCK theft deterrent, down until SEC appears on the display.
perform the following steps: 4. Press MIN.
1. Write down any number from 000 to 1999. 000 will appear on the display.
2. Turn the ignition to the ACC or the RUN position. 5. Press MIN again in order to make sure the last
3. Turn the radio OFF. two digits agree with the user code.
4. Press the 1 and 4 push-buttons together. Hold 6. Press AM/FM after you have confirmed that the
them down until — shows on the display. code matches the user code you have.
5. You are now ready to enter your code. Do not 7. The display will show — , indicating that the radio
wait more than 15 seconds between each step. is no longer secured.
6 . Press MIN 000. 8. If the code is entered incorrectly, SEC will appear
on the display.
MIN 000 will appear on the display.
9. The radio will remain secured until the correct
7. Press the MIN push button again in order to make code is entered. If the correct code is not
the last 2 ,digits agree with your code. available, the dealer will need to Dial Delco or
8. Press the HR push button in order to make the Technical Assistance.
first 1 or 2 digits agree with your code.
Remote Compact Disc Player
9. Press the AM/FM push button after you have
confirmed that the code matches the code you • With the remote compact disk player option, a
wrote down. REP appears on the display, single compact disc (CD) can be played.
indicating that steps 5 -7 need to be repeated. • In order to load a CD into the player, hold the disc
10. Press AM/FM. This time the display will show label side up and insert it approximately halfway
. SEC. SEC means that your radio is secure. into the player.
11. Note: With the ignition OFF, the THEFTLOCK The disc will automatically be pulled the rest of
indicator will flash. the way into the player.
• If the radio is OFF and the ignition is ON when a
To Unlock THEFTLOCK After a Power Loss CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and begin
• In order to unlock the THEFTLOCK system playing the CD.
after a power loss, enter the user code as follows; • It is possible to load and unload CD’s with the
Do not wait more than 15 seconds between steps. ignition OFF.
1. Press MIN. In order to load a disc with the ignition OFF,
000 will appear on the display. press the eject button on the remote player and
2. Press the MIN push button again in order to then insert the disc.
make the last two digits agree with your code. • In order to remove the disc, press the EJECT
3. Press the HR push button in order to make the button and remove the disc from the player.
first one or two digits agree with your code. • A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in
4. Press the AM/FM push button after you have the remote CD player will be pulled back into
confirmed that the code matches the one you the player after approximately 30 seconds.
wrote down. • This protects the disc and player from damage.
SEC will appear in the display indicating The disc will not start playing.
that the radio is now operable. • All of the compact disc functions are controlled by
• If the code is entered incorrectly, SEC will appear the radio buttons except for EJECT.
on the display. • When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will
• The radio will remain secured until the correct appear on the display.
code is entered. • When a disc is playing, the letters CD will appear
• If the correct code is not available, the dealer will next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner.
need to Dial Delco or Technical Assistance. The track number will also be displayed.
• When battery power is removed and later applied • If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on
to a secured radio, the radio will not turn on and the display, the problem could include one of
LOC will appear in the display. the following reasons:
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature • Upside down disc
In order to disable the theft-deterrent feature, enter • A dirty, scratched, or wet disc
the user code as follows; Do not wait more than • There is too much moisture in the air.
15 seconds between steps. Wait an hour and try again.
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. • The vehicle is operating on a very rough road.
2. Turn the radio OFF.
Previous Track (PREV) Radio/Audio System Circuit Description
Press SEEK down or PREV in order to search for the
previous selection. Hold the push button or press it
Radio
more than once to back up the disc further. • Voltage to the radio is available at all times
through CKT 1140 (ORN).
Audio is muted during SEEK.
8 CKT 1140 provides voltage for radio station
Random Playback (RDM) memory storage and for the clock memory.
The random playback (RDM) feature allows the tracks • With the ignition switch in ACC or RUN, voltage is
on the compact disc to be played in random order supplied to the radio through the RADIO fuse and
rather than in sequential order. CKT 43 (YEL).
In order to start or stop the random playback feature, • Each speaker has its own pair of leads.
press PSCAN.
• The radio/clock display brightness is at full
During random playback, a RANDOM indicator intensity with the ignition switch in ACC or RUN.
appears in the display. The voltage is supplied by CKT 43 (YEL).
Next Selection (NEXT) • When the parklamps or headlamps are turned
Press SEEK up or NEXT in order to search for the ON, voltage is supplied to the radio through
next selection. CKT 1382 (PPL/WHT).
If you hold the SEEK up or NEXT push button or • When the radio senses the signal, the radio
press the SEEK or NEXT push button more than once, switches voltage for the display from CKT 43
the disc will advance further. (YEL) to CKT 8 (GRY).
Audio is muted during NEXT. The display brightness is then controlled by the
panel and interior lamps control switch.
Reverse (REV) • The radio illumination bulb voltage is supplied by
Press and hold the REV push-button in order to return CKT 8 (GRY).
rapidly to a favorite passage. This is an audible
search at a high rate of speed. Release REV in order Power Amplifier (Suburban Only)
to resume play at normal speed. • The optional amplifier boosts the sound of the
4 rear speakers in the Suburban when equipped
Forward (FWD) with the premium sound system.
Press and hold FWD in order to advance quickly • With the ignition switch in the ACC or RUN
within a track. This is an audible search at a high rate
position and the radio control head ON, battery
of speed. Release FDW in order to resume play at voltage is supplied to the power amplifier relay.
normal speed.
Voltage is supplied through CKT 143 (PNK/BLK)
Recall (RECALL) and CKT 40 (ORN).
Press RECALL to see what track is playing. Press The relay is grounded through CKT 150 (BLK) at
RECALL again within 5 seconds to view elapsed time. IP ground 200.
Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and seconds. • When the relay contacts close, battery voltage is
Press RECALL again to return to the time of day. The supplied to the power amplifier through
track number appears when a new track starts CKT 140 (ORN).
to play.
The ground is completed through CKT 150 (BLK)
Tape/Auxiliary (TAPE/AUX) at IP ground 200.
With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing, Auxiliary Speaker-Z56
press the TAPE/AUX once in order to play the
compact disc. In order to return to playing the radio, If the vehicle is equipped with option WX7 as part of
press AM/FM. If both a cassette tape and the CD the police package Z56, the front door speakers
are loaded, press TAPE/AUX to switch between the are not connected to the radio. The speakers are
tape and the compact disc. connected to a jumper harness blunt cut and coiled
under the center of the IP. The speaker connection
Ejecting a Compact Disc (EJECT) allows the front door speakers to be connected directly
Press the EJECT button on the remote player in order up to any aftermarket radio/communication equipment.
to eject the compact disc. The disc will start at track
one when the disc is reinserted.

1998 Sec 8-Body and Accessories PG 8-1 - PG 8-244

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1998 Sec 8-Body and Accessories PG 8-1 - PG 8-244

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section 8

Body and Accessories

Lighting Systems ....................................... 8-15 Headlamps Inoperative -

Lighting Systems Schematic Icons

-----------------»---------------- «>--------------- 1 YEL 10

1 BLK 150 1 BLK 250

S123 Ground Ground Ground

M G113 t G112 .6113 G112

f Power ^ "1 Stoplamp Underhood I °c |

150 5 BLK 150

1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451

±G103 G104 lG104

1 BLK 940 1 BLK 940

Trail er Tail LH Turn/ RH Turn/ Backup Battery Auxiliary

0.8 PNK 139-

/ 1 Defeat l And Panel 0.8 PPL 328

0.8 BLK 150.

0.8 ORN 740 0

0.8 ORN 740

0.8 ORN 740

0.8 BLK 150 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382

0.8 PPL/WHT 1382 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382

A A ........................................... 'Cluster Fog Lamp

Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector

Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector

Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector

Right Rear of the cylinder head, Power and Grounding

Engine Compartment, Behind the right Power and Grounding

from the Fuel Injector harness breakout, — —.

towards the Taillamp harness breakout

IP harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from

S239 In fuel select switch jumper harness — —

S247 Crossbody harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in)

Crossbody harness, approx. 35 cm (13 in)

Crossbody harness, approx. 19 cm (7.5 in)

S411 Taillamp harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)

S411 (Suburban/Utility/ Taillamp hamess, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)

S412 Taillamp harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in)

S414 Tailamp harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from

(1) C120 (2) C107

(1) Forward Lamp Harness (2) Fog Lamp Connector

(1) Emergency Roof Lamp Switch

(1) Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Left (Right Opposite)

(1) Front-to-Rear Body Harness (6) Dome Lamp Hamess

(1) Rear Dome Lamp

Center High Mount Stoplamp Wiring

0 ) Cargo Door Contactor and

(1) C408 (2) Endgate Marker Lamps

(1) License Lamps

Connector Part • 12103583

Connector Part • 12160938

•12064749 Connector Part 59251

Connector Part • 59251 Connector Part • 12015792

Connector Part • 12059181 • 12059183

Headlamp Low Beam, RH

Connector Part • 12059181

Instrument Panel (IP) Compartment Lamp

Connector Part ® 12020348

Connector Part 08294702 • 1204766

Connector Part • 12047663 236398

Information • 2 Way F Metri-Pack 150

Connector Part • 12065861 Connector Part 12162000

DRL System Check